ABB-EIB Manual Literature

Distribution Boards & Consumer Units
Enclosures for system pro M compact
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution Boards & Consumer Units
Contents General Distribution Boards Mini Center compact Mounting kits for compact accessories Consumer Units Styler Dimensional details 2/4
5/7 8
9 10
1
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution Boards
General
Our mission is to meet customers expectations by providing satisfaction through cost, quality, service, delivery and continuous improvement. ABB Mini Center Compact distribution boards are the basis for development and growth in meeting all the demands for a successful future in residential, commercial, and infrastructure segments. The wide range of distribution boards enables each customer to select an individual and economical configuration according to his requirements and satisfaction. ABB Mini Center Compact distribution boards have been designed using the latest available technology and comply with the following standards: IEC 439-3 and BS EN 60439-3 Features Reliable and safe Mini Center Compact is a reliable range of distribution boards allowing maximum flexibility, offering wide choice of incomers: Switch Disconnector, MCCB, MCB, RCCB, RCD or direct cable connection. The busbar design eliminates risk of the hot spots. Busbar and terminals are shrouded for additional safety protection. The pan assembly is designed to allow dismounting and mounting of MCBs without obstructing the other MCBs. The front cover mounting screws are located behind the door for added personal security. It has the advantage of either factory fitted incoming devices or the choice of a wide range of incoming kits that can be easily fitted by the installer himself. Easy to select Clear detailed description of each size and easy to select with the ordering codes. Easy to install Box with four studs and adjustable nuts for easy fit / easy removal of the pan assembly. Easy to use Generous wiring space. Easy fit of incomer devices, aluminum profile with plastic clip for self aligning feature of outgoing MCBs. Easy to remove or change gland plates and fix top / bottom extension boxes.
Type Test Certification
Mini Center Compact Sheet steel enclosures Type A and Type B Flush and surface mounting Indoor use Top and bottom feed Various copper connection kits for all incoming options Aluminum support rail for easy placing of outgoing MCB Extension boxes: 200 and 400 mm high Distribution boards, together with modular ABB system pro M Compact protection devices and Modular Din Rail Components, can be used for many applications in electrical building installations. Solutions with tailor made distribution boards to meet customer requirements other than standards ones. More than 200 combinations.
2
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution boards
Main incoming options
Main RCCB Main Isolator, MCB + RCCB
Direct Connection
Combination Busbar + DIN Rail
Main MCCB up to 160A T1, E, B, C & N
Main MCB
Main MCCB up to 250A T3N
Multi Row Combination Split type busbar + DIN Rail
3
1SKC802027C0201
Consumer Units
General
Styler Consumer Units, a design perfectly suited to installation in domestic and commercial applications, easy to install and high reliability.
Features Available in 7, 10, 15 and 20 modules, enabling the installer to design a consumer unit to individual specification. Ample knock-outs on top, bottom, and rear for cables and conduits entries.
Neutral and Earth terminal bars are provided as standard. The front steel cover is fitted with a transparent flap for visual inspection. The front cover mounting screws are located behind the transparent flap for added personal security. Concise circuit identification labels. Styler Consumer units, together with modular ABB system pro M Compact protection devices and Modular Din Rail Components, can be used in domestic and commercial applications.
4
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution Boards
Mini Center compact Technical Data / Ordering details
Standard Busbar Rating Busbar Type Voltage Rating Fault level No. of Ways Degree of Protection Enclosure Material Steel Thickness. Knock outs - Body Gland Plates Enclosure Finish Paint Film Thickness Incoming Options Terminals Capacity : EC 439-3 & BS 60439-3 : 200/250A : Fully shrouded dual solid tin plated copper : 220-440VAC 50/60 H : 35 kA : 12, 18,24,30,36,48,60,72 SPN : 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24 TPN : IP 41 : Galvanized steel sheet : Box for 12-72 SPN 4-24 TPN 1 mm Pan assembly 12-72 SPN 4-24 TPN 1.5 mm : Top & bottom : Removable gland plates top and bottom : Gray, RAL 7035. Polyester epoxy powder paint. Other colours on request : 60 - 80 microns : Switch-Isolator, MCB, MCCB, RCCB, Direct Connection : Switch-Isolator, Rotary Type Switches: 50 mm2 MCB Frame size 63A: 25 mm2 MCB Frame size 100A: 50 mm2 MCCB Frame size 160A: 70 mm2 & 95 mm2 MCCB Frame size 250A: 185 mm RCCB Frame size 63A: 25 mm RCCB Frame size 100A: 50 mm Direct cable connection with cable lugs: 150 mm2 : 16 mm2 terminals for outgoing cables, and 2 x 50 mm2 for incoming cable : 16 mm2 terminals for outgoing cables, and 2 x 50 mm2 for incoming cable
Neutral Terminals Bar Earth Terminals Bar
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: Switch Isolator up to 125A Type E200 I series Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 S100FC GDMS318 S100FC GDMS324 S100FC GDMS330 S100FC GDMS336 S100FC GDMS348 S100FC GDMS360 S100FC GDMS372 S100FC 2CVB 101 091 M0001 2CVB 201 091 M0001 2CVB 301 091 M0001 2CVB 401 091 M0001 2CVB 501 091 M0001 2CVB 601 091 M0001 2CVB 701 091 M0001 2CVB 801 091 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: MCB up to 100A Type S280C Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 E100FC GDMS318 E100FC GDMS324 E100FC GDMS330 E100FC GDMS336 E100FC GDMS348 E100FC GDMS360 E100FC GDMS372 E100FC 2CVB 102 091 M0001 2CVB 202 091 M0001 2CVB 302 091 M0001 2CVB 402 091 M0001 2CVB 502 091 M0001 2CVB 602 091 M0001 2CVB 702 091 M0001 2CVB 802 091 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
5
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution Boards
Mini Center compact Ordering details (continued)
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: MCCB up to 160A Type Tmax T1 Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 C160FC GDMS318 C160FC GDMS324 C160FC GDMS330 C160FC GDMS336 C160FC GDMS348 C160FC GDMS360 C160FC GDMS372 C160FC 2CVB 104 111 M0001 2CVB 204 111 M0001 2CVB 304 111 M0001 2CVB 404 111 M0001 2CVB 504 111 M0001 2CVB 604 111 M0001 2CVB 704 111 M0001 2CVB 804 111 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: MCCB up to 250A Type Tmax T3 Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 M250FC GDMS318 M250FC GDMS324 M250FC GDMS330 M250FC GDMS336 M250FC GDMS348 M250FC GDMS360 M250FC GDMS372 M250FC 2CVB 105 151 M0001 2CVB 205 151 M0001 2CVB 305 151 M0001 2CVB 405 151 M0001 2CVB 505 151 M0001 2CVB 605 151 M0001 2CVB 705 151 M0001 2CVB 805 151 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: RCCB up to 100A Type F200 Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 R63FC GDMS318 R63FC GDMS324 R63FC GDMS330 R63FC GDMS336 R63FC GDMS348 R63FC GDMS360 R63FC GDMS372 R63FC 2CVB 103 071 M0001 2CVB 203 071 M0001 2CVB 303 071 M0001 2CVB 403 071 M0001 2CVB 503 071 M0001 2CVB 603 071 M0001 2CVB 703 071 M0001 2CVB 803 071 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: Direct connection for cable lugs up to 150 mm2 Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 D200FC GDMS318 D200FC GDMS324 D200FC GDMS330 D200FC GDMS336 D200FC GDMS348 D200FC GDMS360 D200FC GDMS372 D200FC 2CVB 107 131 M0001 2CVB 207 131 M0001 2CVB 307 131 M0001 2CVB 407 131 M0001 2CVB 507 131 M0001 2CVB 607 131 M0001 2CVB 707 131 M0001 2CVB 807 131 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
6
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution Boards
Mini Center compact Ordering details (continued)
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: Combination busbar and Din Rail Ways 1P 12 18 24 30 36 48 60 72 3P 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 559 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1134 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS312 MXFC GDMS318 MXFC GDMS324 MXFC GDMS330 MXFC GDMS336 MXFC GDMS348 MXFC GDMS360 MXFC GDMS372 MXFC 2CVB 106 001 M0001 2CVB 206 001 M0001 2CVB 306 001 M0001 2CVB 406 001 M0001 2CVB 506 001 M0001 2CVB 606 001 M0001 2CVB 706 001 M0001 2CVB 806 001 M0001 Weight kg 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: Isolator, MCB + RCCB Ways 1P 12+12 18+12 18+18 24+12 24+18 3P 4+4 6+4 6+6 8+4 8+6 Dimensions H x W x D mm 920 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 1027 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS344 ER100FC GDMS364 ER100FC GDMS366 ER100FC GDMS384 ER100FC GDMS386 ER100FC 2CVB 908 091 M0001 2CVB 909 091 M0001 2CVB 910 091 M0001 2CVB 911 091 M0001 2CVB 912 091 M0001 Weight kg 11 13 15 17 19
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Incomer Type: Combination Split Busbar and DIN Rail Ways 1P 12+12 18+12 18+18 24+12 24+18 3P 4+4 6+4 6+6 8+4 8+6 Dimensions H x W x D mm 701 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS344 SD100FC GDMS364 SD100FC GDMS366 SD100FC GDMS384 SD100FC GDMS386 SD100FC 2CVB 913 091 P0001 2CVB 914 091 P0001 2CVB 915 091 P0001 2CVB 916 091 P0001 2CVB 917 091 P0001 Weight kg 11 13 15 17 19
Extension Boxes Description Cable box height 200 Cable box height 400 Box with steel flap & one Din Rail Dimensions H x W x D mm 200 x 400 x 117 400 x 400 x 117 200 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS200 EXBEFC 2CVA 002 101 R1001 GDMS400 EXBEFC 2CVA 002 102 R1001 GDMS200 EXBFFC 2CVA 002 103 R1001 Weight kg 3 5 3
Multi row type distribution boards 16 modules per row (distance between rows 150 mm) No. of Rows 2 3 4 5 Dimensions H x W x D mm 498 x 400 x 117 648 x 400 x 117 752 x 400 x 117 920 x 400 x 117 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GDMS332 RX GDMS348 RX GDMS364 RX GDMS380 RX 2CVA 250 001 P0001 2CVA 360 001 P0001 2CVA 470 001 P0001 2CVA 580 001 P0001 Weight kg 10 12 14 16
7
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution boards
Mounting kits Ordering details
Isolator, MCB Shroud Description Shroud for 3 pole Isolator or MCB Ordering details Type Code Type No. SA5827 059PA 2CVN 001 101 R1001 Weight kg 0.15
RCCB Incoming Shroud Description Shroud for 4 pole RCCB Ordering details Type Code Type No. SA5827 095PA 2CVN 001 102 R1001 Weight kg 0.12
MCCB Tmax T1 Incoming Shroud Description Shroud for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T1 Ordering details Type Code Type No. SA5827 090 2CVN 001 103 R1001 Weight kg 0.13
MCCB Tmax T3 Incoming Shroud Description Shroud for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T3 Ordering details Type Code Type No. SA5827 091 2CVN 001 104 R1001 Weight kg 0.14
MCCB Tmax T1 Incoming Copper Connections Description Copper connections for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T1 Ordering details Type Code Type No. SA5281 008PG 2CVN 001 105 R1001 Weight kg 0.21
MCCB Tmax T3 Incoming Copper Connections Description Copper connections for 3 pole MCCB Tmax Type T3 Ordering details Type Code Type No. SA5281 026PG 2CVN 001 106 R1001 Weight kg 0.23
Neutral or earth bar with terminal 16 mm2 Description Ordering details Type Code Type No. 2CVN 001 107 R1001 2CVN 001 108 R1001 Weight kg 0.18 0.23
Neutral or Earth bar suitable for 12, 18, 30, 36 way 1 pole NB-24A or 4, 6, 10, 12 way 3 pole Neutral or Earth bar suitable for 24, 48 way 1 pole NB-30A or 8, 16 way 3 pole
8
1SKC802027C0201
Consumer Units
Styler Technical Data / Ordering details
Standard Maximum Load Maximum Voltage Range Degree of Protection Enclosure Material Steel Thickness. Knock outs - Body Enclosure Finish Paint Film Thickness Plastic Film & Flap Incoming Options Terminals Capacity : EC 439-3 & BS 60439-3 : 100A : 220-440VAC 50/60 H : 7, 10, 16 and 20 TPN : IP 40 : Aluzinc steel sheet: Optimum corrosion resistance and galvanic protection on the steel : Box and cover 1 mm : Top, bottom and rear : Gray, RAL 7035. Polyester epoxy powder paint. Other colours on request : 60 - 80 microns : Switch-Isolator, MCB, and RCCB : Switch-Isolator, Rotary Type Switches: 50 mm2 MCB Frame size 63A: 25 mm2 RCCB Frame size 63A: 25 mm2 RCCB Frame size 100A: 50 mm2 : 16 mm2 : 16 mm2
Neutral Terminals Bar Earth Terminals Bar
Plastic flap Modules 7 10 16 20 Dimensions H x W x D mm 250 x 203 x 90 250 x 257 x 90 250 x 362 x 90 250 x 434 x 90 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GCMC 107PLFC GCMC 110PLFC GCMC 116PLFC GCMC 120PLFC 2CVA 111 001 P0001 2CVA 121 001 P0001 2CVA 131 001 P0001 2CVA 141 001 P0001 Weight kg 2 3 4 5
Steel flap Modules 7 10 16 20 Dimensions H x W x D mm 250 x 203 x 90 250 x 257 x 90 250 x 362 x 90 250 x 434 x 90 Ordering details Type Code Type No. GCMC 107SLSC GCMC 110SLSC GCMC 116SLSC GCMC 120SLSC 2CVA 112 001 P0001 2CVA 122 001 P0001 2CVA 132 001 P0001 2CVA 142 001 P0001 Weight kg 2 3 4 5
9
1SKC802027C0201
Distribution Boards
Mini Center compact Dimensional details
TP + N busbar type distribution boards Type Code GDMS312 xxxxFC GDMS318 xxxxFC GDMS324 xxxxFC GDMS330 xxxxFC GDMS336 xxxxFC GDMS348 xxxxFC GDMS360 xxxxFC GDMS372 xxxxFC GDMS312 MXFC GDMS318 MXFC GDMS324 MXFC GDMS330 MXFC GDMS336 MXFC GDMS348 MXFC GDMS360 MXFC GDMS372 MXFC GDMS344 ER100FC GDMS364 ER100FC GDMS366 ER100FC GDMS384 ER100FC GDMS386 ER100FC GDMS344 SD100FC GDMS364 SD100FC GDMS366 SD100FC GDMS384 SD100FC GDMS386 SD100FC B (mm) 518 579 668 721 772 940 1047 1145 518 579 668 721 772 940 1047 1145 940 940 1047 1047 1047 721 772 940 940 940 D (mm) K (mm) 498 559 648 701 752 920 1027 1134 498 559 648 701 752 920 1027 1134 920 920 1027 1027 1027 701 752 920 920 920 372 433 522 575 626 794 901 1008 372 433 522 575 626 794 901 1008 794 794 901 901 901 575 626 794 794 794
400
296
400
Multi row type distribution boards 16 modules per row

420 296
Type Code GDMS332 RX GDMS348 RX GDMS364 RX GDMS380 RX
B (mm) 518 668 772 940
D (mm) K (mm) 498 648 752 920 372 522 626 794
400
Extension Boxes
420 296
Type Code GDMS200 EXBEFC GDMS400 EXBEFC GDMS200 EXBFFC
B (mm) 210 410 210
D (mm) K (mm) 200 400 200 74 274 74
400
10
1SKC802027C0201
Consumer Units
Styler Dimensional details
Plastic flap
Type Code
274 250 146
A (mm) 227 281 386 458
C (mm) J (mm) 203 257 362 434 133 183 290 362
GCMC 107PLFC GCMC 110PLFC GCMC 116PLFC GCMC 120PLFC
Steel flap
Type Code
274 250 146
A (mm) 227 281 386 458
C (mm) J (mm) 203 257 362 434 133 183 290 362
GCMC 107SLSC GCMC 110SLSC GCMC 116SLSC GCMC 120SLSC
11
1SKC802027C0201
Notes
12
1SKC802027C0201
As part of its on-going product improvement, ABB reserves the right to modify the characteristics or the products described in this document. The information given is not-contractual. For further details please contact the ABB company marketing these products in your country.
ABB Electrical Industries Co. Ltd. Riyadh P.O. Box 251 Riyadh 11383, KSA Tel.: + 966 (1) 265 3030 Fax: + 966 (1) 265 1211 Al-Khobar P.O. Box 2873 Al-Khobar 31952, KSA Tel.: + 966 (3) 882 9394 Fax: + 966 (3) 882 4603 Jeddah P.O. Box 12539 jeddah 21483, KSA Tel.: + 966 (2) 669 6909 Fax: + 966 (2) 669 4310
www.abb.com.sa
Publication No:1SKC802027C0201 Printed in Egypt (Dec. 2007) ein visual communication
ABB ABBi-bus i-bus KNX KNX Applikationshandbuch Application Manual Jalousiesteuerung Shutter Control
Description of the symbols: Sample Note Tip Disadvantage Advantage
This manual describes the function of the Lighting systems. Subject to changes and errors excepted. Limitation of liability: Despite checking that the contents of this document match the hardware and software, deviations cannot be completely excluded. We therefore cannot accept any liability for this. Any necessary corrections will be inserted in new versions of the manual. Please inform us of any suggested improvements. E-mail: eib.hotline@de.abb.com
Table of content
Preface/General ...................................................................................................................... 2
1. Introduction
1.1. Selection of the required circuit and control functions .................................................. 5
2. Circuit design
2.1. Switching from one or more positions .............................................................................. 6 2.1.1. KNX bus push buttons.................................................................................................. 6 2.1.2. Conventional push buttons with binary input ................................................................ 7 2.1.3. Drive control ................................................................................................................ 8 2.1.4. Bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery, programming ............................................... 14 2.2. Group and central circuits .................................................................................................. 16 2.2.1. Sending two group addresses ...................................................................................... 17 2.2.2. Central command and status feedback ........................................................................ 18
3. Control functions
3.1. Timer control ........................................................................................................................ 19 3.1.1. Devices for implementation of timer functions ............................................................. 19 3.1.2. Timer control combined with conditions ....................................................................... 20 3.2. Movement to positions ........................................................................................................ 24 3.2.1. Automatic functions ..................................................................................................... 24 3.2.2. Realisation with standard drives .................................................................................. 25 3.3. Sensor-dependent control .................................................................................................. 28 3.3.1. Weather-dependent control.......................................................................................... 28 3.3.2. Temperature dependent control ................................................................................... 33
Appendix
Checklist ............................................................................................................................... 39
Preface/General
General
ABB i-bus systems offer an attractive solution which fulls the highest standards in residential, commercial and public buildings. Quality of living, comfort and safety can be easily combined with cost-effectiveness and environmental awareness using ABB i-bus systems. The ABB i-bus products cover the entire range of applications in buildings: from illumination and shutter control to heating, ventilation, energy management, security and surveillance. These demands are can be realised cost-effectively with minimal planning and installation effort using the ABB i-bus. Furthermore, the exible usage of rooms and the continuous adaptation to changing requirements are simple to realise. Important for the realisation of the elevated demands of building users is however, professional and detailed planning. This application manual from practical application for practical usage is intended to assist simpler planning and implementation of a project.
Planning of a project
One of the main considerations when planning a building control with the ABB i-bus is whether the actuators for the circuits are installed on a centralised or distributed basis.
Central installation
In smaller properties, houses or apartments, all wiring to consumers can be brought to a central point.
A central installation is more transparent, fewer KNX components are required and the cost per channel is lower.
A central installation requires more wiring effort and expense.
Distributed installation
In a distributed installation the devices are installed in the vicinity of the load.
A distributed installation requires less wiring effort on the load end.
A distributed installation signicantly increases the cost per channel. The overall system can quickly lose transparency and devices may possibly be difcult to access. As the number of KNX devices increases with a distributed installation, the programming effort also increases. Additional power supplies and couplers may be necessary, which will also increase costs.
Preface/General
Conclusion
During planning, it is increasingly signicant to consider the constructive features of a building. In practical use, a combination of central and distributed installation has proven to be useful. Distributed installation is not possible, for example, in a dwelling due to space considerations. For larger buildings, a central installation can mean a room, a hall or a oor, which still complies with a distributed installation in terms of the overall concept. A further solution for a distributed, room-oriented application is the Room Controller RC/A 8.1 and Room Master RM/S x.1 from ABB. For further information refer to the Room Controller and Room Master product manual.
ABB i-bus application manual shading/windows/skylights/awnings

All the possible circuit congurations are explained after a brief introduction in this application manual, e.g. operation from one or more points. The many application examples are complemented by information, tips, benets and disadvantages which offer a quick and simple insight into the advantages of the different control functions, e.g. timer control, sensor-dependent control. The selection possibilities of the individual control functions and their combination possibilities are very comprehensive. The checklist from ABB has proven to be very useful for simplication of the engineering involved. A checklist template can be found in the Appendix.
Introduction
1.
Introduction
The control of motor drives is one of the main applications of the ABB i-bus. The following applications can be operated with motor drives: Shutters with and without louvres, e.g. in commercial buildings such as ofces, hospitals, schools Roller blinds, e.g. like in dwellings Electrically operated windows Skylights, e.g. in factory halls Electrically operated curtains Doors, e.g. garage doors Awnings Partitions Ventilation aps Up to now, only on-site operation of drives was possible in most cases. This makes the use of additional functions such as wind monitoring devices or central/group controls more difcult. The implementation of such functions can only be undertaken with a lot of effort and was therefore expensive as a result. Implementation is not a problem with the ABB i-bus. There is complete exibility for the following : On-site control Group/central operation UP/DOWN functions STOP functions Adjustment of louvres Move to position Safety monitoring, e.g. with weather sensors Timer control, e.g. with absence of the occupants Inhibiting/interlocking a drive Automatic functions
Automatic shading should be implemented in a school so that lessons are not interrupted. However, darkening of each individual classroom must still be possible when required, e.g. when showing a lm or beamer presentation.
Important preliminary considerations of such a project have proven useful for optimum planning of a project. This includes selection of the circuit and control functions.
Introduction
1.1.
Selection of the required circuit and control functions
The shutter and roller blind control with ABB i-bus is characterised by a high level of exibility. This includes a large range of individual control functions and their combination possibilities. The following functions are available: Circuit design Switching from one or more positions Central and group switching Control functions Timer control Movement to positions Sensor-dependent control Weather Temperature
Circuit design
2.
Circuit design
To plan a useful circuit design, the different circuit congurations must be reviewed in the preliminary considerations and then selected appropriately: Switching of one or more positions Central and group switching
2.1.
Switching of one or more positions
Even with the use of intelligent electrical installation systems such as ABB i-bus, the basic functions for every application with shutter actuators incorporate local operation of one or more drives using push buttons. These are generally tried-and-tested and proven in practice.
The shutters in a conference room should be moved as required. One or more drives are operated using a local button. The following principle has proven itself in practice: Long button push: the shutter moves upward, a logical 0 is sent, or downwards and a logical 1 is sent (1 bit command). Short button push: the shutter stops (1 bit command). Repeated short button push after the stop command: the shutter moves in steps or the louvers are adjusted. The operating principle can be implemented with KNX bus push buttons or with conventional push buttons in conjunction with a binary input.
2.1.1. KNX bus push buttons

With this solution, the functions are implemented with both sides of the KNX push button, i.e. one end is used for up and the other is used for down. Both ends enable the stop function and the louvre adjustment.
Circuit design
2.1.2 Conventional push buttons with binary input

If a Binary Input is used, e.g. US/U x.x or BE/S x.x, it is possible to operate with just a single input and one push button. Here an alternate long button push operates the UP/DOWN function and a short button push the STOP function or louvre adjustment.
Only one channel and push button are required. The parameterisation offers a high level of exibility. You can also connect (rotary) switches.
Fig. 1: Parameters for Binary Input as a shutter sensor
If the shutter is in the middle position, it is not clear beforehand the direction which the shutter will move after a long button push. This type of operation is unconventional for shutters.
Sending a 1 bit telegram with the value 0 for UP, or the value 1 for DOWN is dened in the KNX and should be observed with central commands. The assignment of the functions for short and long operation as described above has proven useful in practice. The functions can be swapped as both commands are 1 bit telegrams. The functions behind the short and long operation can be assigned on two different push buttons. This is not implemented for economy reasons with room buttons (double the number of push buttons), but is frequently used in control panels or LCD displays. The group addresses of these functions, move UP/DOWN, STOP or louvre adjustment are different!
Circuit design
2.1.3. Drive control

The drives are controlled by a changeover contact in the shutter actuator. The corresponding winding in the drive is controlled to comply with the direction of motion. It is not possible to activate both drive windings simultaneously. This would cause the destruction of the drive.
L N PE
M
A
M
B
M
C
M
D
JA/S 4.230.1
Fig. 2: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.230.1
There are conventional actuators which can be programmed as a Switch Actuator or a Shutter Actuator. When used as a shutter output, two relays are used which are mutually exclusive using software. A mechanical interlock is not available which in the most unfavourable cases, e.g. software problems, can cause damage to the motor. In the parameters of the Shutter Actuators, e.g. MDRC devices JA/S x.x or modules of the Room Controller JA/M 2.x.1, it is still possible to make every channel a switch channel. Here, only one end of the changeover contact is used, see Fig. 3. The number of parameters is reduced using software so that it ts classical switching functions, e.g. ventilation aps or lights.
Circuit design
The following circuit shows the switch actuator function using the ventilation ap connection as an example:
L1 L2 2 N PE
M
A
M
B
M
C
M
D
JA/S 4.230.1
Fig. 3: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.230.1 with switch actuator/ventilation ap function
The shutter actuators have 6 A relays installed which are practically always sufcient for the drives which are to be connected.
Unlike switch actuators and lamps, several loads (drives) will not be connected in parallel to the channels of the shutter actuators. If a drive was still operating and the other was already in its end position and switched off via an end limit switch, reverse voltage will occur on the drive and could damage it.
If this type of installation is still demanded, operation with isolating relays is required.
For further information see: Parallel connection of several drives, Cap. 2.1.3.4.
Circuit design
2.1.3.1. DC drives
In addition to 230 V AC drives, there are also DC drives. Their area of application is with electrically operated windows and internal blinds. On DC drives, the direction of operation is reversed by changing the polarity on the drive. In principle, the respective actuators function exactly as with the AC drives, see Fig. 4. The application software is also the same. The DC supply is applied externally. The shutter actuator permits a voltage between 12 and 48 V.
M
A
M
B
M
C
M
D
JA/S 4.24.1
Fig. 4: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.24.1 with DC motors
2.1.3.2. Reversal time or Pause on change in direction

An important parameter in the shutter actuators is the so-called reversal time. It denes how long the drive remains stationary when a command is issued to move in the other direction while the drive is operational.
This time is important for the protection of the motor or the connected mechanical components. The default value is 500 ms and should be corrected if necessary after consulting the manufacturer of the drive.
10
Circuit design
2.1.3.3. End limit stop

Shutter drives feature an end limit stop in the housing. If the drive reaches the end position at the top or bottom and with closed or opened windows, the drive must be stopped. The drive is disconnected from the voltage supply. This is achieved using end limit switches. There are two possibilities for an end limit stop: Mechanical end limit switches End limit stop via overcurrent or undercurrent Mechanical end limit switches The drive operates the shutter until the respective end limit position is reached. The circuit is interrupted here. End limit stop via overcurrent or undercurrent With an end limit stop initiated by overcurrent or undercurrent, the drive moves to the respective end position and is mechanically blocked. The resulting increase (drive in upper end position) or reduction in current (drive in lower end position) is detected and switch off is initiated.
The motor also switches off when an obstacle is detected.
The drive and the shutters to be controlled must be matched to one another, i.e. correctly congured. Otherwise the drive will not operate correctly, i.e. the shutter may stop in the middle or too late in the end position. This can damage the shutter.
To guarantee an exact position feedback of the shutters, (also refer to chapter 3.2 Positioning) the travel time of the shutter must be entered for the Shutter Actuator in the application. After the travel time has elapsed, the changeover contact is switched to a no-voltage state. Using a further parameter, the time for shut down can be selected to be longer than the real run time, ensuring the drive reaches the end positions even under unfavourable conditions. End limit position switch off is mandatory. The isolation of the relay in the Shutter Actuator is only an additional protective measure.
11
Circuit design
2.1.3.4. Parallel connection of several drives

Normally only one drive is connected per channel, otherwise reverse voltages may occur with the parallel connection of several drives to a channel. Background:
Fig. 5: Source: Berker
Both drives are controlled in the same direction of operation when the switch is actuated. When drive 1 has reached the end position, end position switch E2 opens. Drive 2 is still in operation and puts drive 1 back into operation moving in the opposite direction via a reverse voltage on its capacitor. Thus E2 is closed again after a short time. As a result, drive 1 again operates in the original direction of motion until contact E2 is reopened. These switching processes can be recognised by oscillation of the shutter/blinds. As the reverse voltage can be up to 1000 V and many changes of direction occur over a short time, end position switch E2 is overloaded. This irrevocably leads to welding of the contacts. Accordingly the end limit stop is put out of operation in this direction of movement. The result: destruction of the motor and/or the shutter/blind. Should parallel installation be required however, it can be implemented in two ways: Use of isolating relays Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1 Use of isolating relays Isolating relays are used between the motors and the changeover contacts of the Shutter Actuator and electrically isolate the motors from one another, so that there are no problems caused by reverse voltages.
There is increased installation and wiring effort which leads to higher costs.
12
Circuit design
Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1 One exception is the use of the Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1. It allows for the connection of two drives to a single channel. These are of course internally isolated by an isolating relay.
L N PE
M
A
M
B
JA/S 2.230.1
Fig. 6
Both drives on channel A or B run in parallel and cannot be operated separately. This fact must be considered in the planning stage.
This solution is often used to save costs.
An alternative here is the use of the Shutter Actuator RA/S 4.230.1, a 4-channel device. The difference to the other Shutter Actuators is the reduced software functionality features: UP/DOWN STOP Louvre adjustment Wind monitor function The price of the 2 x 2-fold Shutter Actuator JA/S 2.230.1 and the Shutter Actuator RA/S 4.230.1 is practically the same.
13
Circuit design
2.1.4. Bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery, programming

To prevent uncontrolled movement or stopping at bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery or programming, there are many setting options in the ETS with the Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x and with the Shutter Actuator Module of the Room Controller.
Fig. 7
No reaction here means that the command is executed up until the end, e.g. when the drive is operating. No position can be set with bus voltage failure.
2.1.4.1. Status messages

Unlike switchable illumination (simply ON or OFF), the motion of drives is a dynamic process. Therefore it is frequently interesting to receive status messages with shutters. The following messages are available for each channel: Position (shutter height and position of the louvres, each are a 1 byte telegram) End limit position reached (1 bit, both for top or bottom) Manual operation Additionally, a status byte is available which will inform you whether automatic or safety functions are present.
14
Circuit design
Standard Motor Interface (SMI) With the use of conventionally available Shutter Actuators and drives, it is not possible to receive feedback messages directly from the drive, e.g. the position or faults. This fact changes with the use of intelligent drives which can communicate with the actuator. A standard for this approach is characterised by the use of the Standard Motor Interface (SMI). ABB already has a KNX Shutter Actuator for SMI motors, the JA/S 4.SMI.1M.
L1 1 2 L2 3 L3 N PE E
max. 4 x SMI
A B C D
max. 4 x SMI
I+
I-
I+
I-
I+
I-
I+
I-
JA JA/S A/S S4 4.SMI.1M .SMI SMI MI I.1M

A B C D
Man. M an.
US
US
L N
Fig. 8: Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.SMI.1M and connection schematic
For further information see: www.smi-group.com and manual JA/S 4.SMI.1M
15
Circuit design
2.2
Group and central circuits
A very important function of the KNX systems is the realisation of group and central circuits. Here the complete building, a oor, or an area composed of a combination of functions can be switched from one or more locations. Using conventional methods, the realisation would require considerable additional installation time and expense. Using the ABB i-bus this is simply possible using the respective programming.
1. In a dwelling, all roller blinds in the living room, all drives on the ground oor as well as all roller blinds in the house can be controlled via push buttons. 2. The shading of an ofce building is retracted every evening; the facade of the building has a uniform appearance. 3. The caretaker of a school can centrally raise or lower the shading of each individual classroom using a visualisation system. With a central command for drives, a separate push button is congured for both UP/DOWN commands. A TOGGLE push button is not useful here, as it is unclear which command is executed next. A free eld of vision to the shading may also not exist.
Fig. 9: Push button for shading on the control panel of the Edison training room at ABB
If all external shutters are to open, and all internal curtains are to close simultaneously in an ofce building via a central command, a group address with logical 0 for Open blinds and a logical 1 for Close curtains must be sent. There are different possibilities available for implementation: Move the Shutter Actuator via the Position function, see chapter 3.2 Positions By inverting the value of a group address, e.g. with the Logic Module LM/S 1.1 or Application Unit ABL/S 2.1 By sending two group addresses with a push button
16
Circuit design
2.2.1. Sending two group addresses

Sending two group addresses is possible, when a group address is sent on the rising edge, when a push button is pressed as well as on the falling edge when the push button is released. Both addresses can contain different values. Devices already featuring this capability are the Binary Inputs BE/S x.x.
Fig. 10
The TRITON push button or the inputs (e.g. BE/S x.x and US/U x.2) with the function 1 bit light scene also enable this function, where two actuator group types use 1 bit with the presetting ON or OFF.
Fig. 11
17
Circuit design
2.2.2. Central command and status feedback

The description of the available status messages with Shutter Actuators are described in chapter 2.1.4.1 Status messages. It is important to observe the telegram trafc caused by status feedback messages of the individual drives during the implementation of a central group address.
In an ofce building with twin-face-facade, all windows are electrically operated via the ABB i-bus. This command is implemented via a visualisation system. All drives practically move at the same time and report by telegram when they have reached their nal positions, e.g. closed, not closed, maybe their position also. This is also shown in the visualisation system. A corresponding communication object is available in the Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x. The consequence is that the quantity of both line and area telegrams will dramatically increase on the bus.
This approach will lead to an increased bus load and may even cause an overload which will result in the loss of data where the states of the windows are not correctly represented.
In order to avoid a possible overload of the bus, the central command is staggered, e.g. command is implemented by storey or facade. Staggered sending is easily implemented with the Application Unit ABL/S 2.1.
Fig. 12: Central shutter control with Application Unit ABL/S 2.1
When triggering the command via the group address 8/0/7, the west facade moves rst, followed 20 s later by the south facade, another 20 s later by the east facade and nally the north facade with a total delay of one minute. The can be subdivided even more if required with the objective of sending the feedback telegrams on the bus at different times.
The outputs should be parameterised so that a new object is sent on each calculation. This ensures that if an identical movement command is received a number of times, e.g. move UP, it will also be undertaken a number of times.
18
Control functions
3.
Control functions
The following control functions are available to operate the shading, windows, skylights and awnings of a building as comfortably as possible: Timer control Movement to positions Sensor-dependent control Weather-dependent control Temperature dependent control
3.1.
Timer control
Timer control is an interesting application for electric drives as it allows determined drives to be operated automatically as a time-dependent function. In addition to the classic possibilities offered by timer control, this may also be combined with different conditions.
3.1.1. Devices for implementation of timer functions

With a bus system such as the ABB i-bus it is easy to control the timer with a central time control clock.
1. In a dwelling the blinds should be raised every morning at 8 a.m. and lowered in the evening at 8 p.m. 2. In an ofce building the sun screen should be lowered in the evening after the ofce closes.
The switch actuators alone do not provide the possibility of switching at certain times. This would be too complex as each device would require its own timer (quartz). Possible devices for realisation of a timer control are: Classic KNX clocks with 2 4 channels LCD Display MT701 Room panel/Control panel and Comfort Panel Application Unit ABZ/S 2.1 with application Times/Quantities Visualisation software
19
Control functions
e.g. FW/S 4.5 L1

1 bit, 8 bit Date, time (3 bytes)
L2 ABZ/S 2.1
L3
Room/control panel
L4
L5
MT/701.2
L6
PC with visualisation
1 bit, 8 bit
Date, time (3 bytes)
Date and time can be received from another KNX clock or transferred to there (data format 3 bytes) At the set times the 1 bit switching telegram or the 8 bit value telegram are sent
1 bit, 8 bit
Fig. 13: Overview KNX devices with time functions
For further information see: Application manual Lighting and lighting control, Devices for implementation of timer functions
3.1.2. Timer control combined with conditions

In addition to the timer control, linking to different conditions is possible: External brightness Presence of persons These functions can be implemented with additional intelligence such as the Application Unit ABL/S 2.1 or the Logic Module LM/S 1.1. The safety and automatic functions are the exception, e.g. wind and rain. These already have a high priority in the Shutter Actuator and always have a higher priority for safety reasons. No external logic except the parameter settings in the Shutter Actuator is required. For further information see: chapter 3.3 Sensor-dependent controls
20
Control functions
3.1.2.1. Linking with external brightness

The blinds in a dwelling should be raised every morning at 8 a.m. and lowered in the evening at 8 p.m. The external brightness should also be considered, i.e. the blinds open at 8 a.m. in the morning, provided that it is bright outside and close at 8 p.m. in the evening, provided that it is dark outside.
Solution with Application Unit ABL/S 2.1 For the closing movement, the operating push button with group address 0/0/3 enables the function with a logical 1. The clock and the Brightness sensor send a logical 1 in the evening. The drive closes the shutters if both conditions are fullled; AND condition: dark and 8 p.m.
Logical 1 lowers, logical 0 raises the shutters. The timer only has the function of setting a 0 lter, i.e. a logical 0 and as a result the open command is inhibited.
Fig. 14: Logic for closing movement
The parameter settings must be observed. The output sends on each calculation.
For the opening movement, the operating push button with group address 0/0/3 enables the function with a logical 1. The clock and the light evaluation switch send a logical 0 in the morning. The drive opens the shutters if both conditions are fullled; OR condition for logical 0: bright and 8 p.m.
21
Control functions
Both states must be 0. Only in this way is the result of the operation a logical 0 and the drive operates to open the shutters. The timer only has the function of setting a 1 lter, i.e. logical 1 and consequently an close command is inhibited.
Fig. 15: Logic for opening movement
The parameter settings must be observed. The output sends on each calculation.
If the input signal is stored in all gates during the inhibit phase, after the function is enabled using the enable button, the original motion command is activated retrospectively.
22
Control functions
3.1.2.2. Link with presence of persons

The shading of an ofce building closes in the evening after the ofce closes. Presence detectors also detect whether there are persons located in the rooms. Using linked conditions, the shading only closes at 5 p.m. in rooms which are not occupied. The shading of the other rooms only automatically closes when persons have left those rooms.
Solution with Application Unit ABL/S2.1 or Logic Module LM/S 1.1 Just one gate is sufcient to implement this function. The clock sends a telegram with the address 0/0/5 and the value 1 at 5 p.m. The presence detector disables the telegram of the timer with a detected presence via the control input or enables it when no presence is detected. By setting the parameter Save during blocking phase, the drive closes if the room is unoccupied later than 5 p.m.
Fig. 16
23
Control functions
3.2.
Movement to positions
Movement to a position is a signicant function in the area of motor operated applications in the eld of building automation. This function is available in all MDRC Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x as well as in Shutter Actuator Module JA/M of the Room Controller.
3.2.1. Automatic functions

Using automatic functions it is unnecessary for the user to set these positions manually on-site.
1. The shading of a public building moves to a shutter height of 50 % when a button is pressed in the room. In this manner, the sun does not shine directly into the room, will not dazzle the occupants and natural light still permeates the room. 2. Louvres are installed in a conservatory to protect against the sun. A brightness sensor detects the external brightness. When a certain value is exceeded, the shutters move down by 80 % and the louvres close up to 75 %.
Electrically operated windows are installed in the upper third of the glazed facade of an ofce building. The window opens via a push button in the room. The windows can move to three positions dependent on the wind speeds.
This automatic function offers a high level of comfort and is economic. The heat irradiation from the sun is reduced and a diffused external lighting source is still provided.
The Positioning function is comparable with a scene. For further information see: Application manual Lighting and lighting control, Scene The communication between the sensor which recalls or stores the position and the Shuter Actuator is via a 1 bit telegram. In this way every sensor can be used without additional devices.
Shutter Actuator
Move to position (height and louvre angle)
Push button
Call position
Save position
Fig. 17: Shutter Actuator with the Positioning function
24
Control functions
It is possible to dene a position via the parameters of the Shutter Actuator, as well as to save the setting of a modied position.
Using a KNX push button two positions should be recalled and stored. Using the left rocker, switch position 1 is recalled with a short button push and stored with a long button push. Using the right rocker switch, position 2 is recalled with a short button push and stored with a long button push. The software function Shutter is used with the push buttons. This can differentiate between long and short button actuation.
Using a further rocker switch of the KNX push button, normal UP/DOWN, stop and possibly even louvre adjustment can be operated.
Light
Light TV
1 Short button push: Move to position 1 Long button push: Save position 1
Position
2 Short button push: Move to position 2 Long button push: Save position 2
Shutter
Shutter DOWN/STOP
Shutter UP/STOP
Fig. 18: KNX push button with 4 rockers
3.2.2. Realisation with standard drives

Conventional standard drives in the eld of intelligent installations have no option for position feedback. For this reason the drive is moved over time, i.e. the run time is measured when the drive moves. Important here is a knowledge of the total travel time. In this way the drive can be positioned accordingly. There are two possibilities for positioning: 1. Indirect positioning 2. Direct positioning
25
>
>
Control functions
3.2.2.1. Indirect positioning

With earlier components it was necessary to move to the end limit position either the upper or lower position before every positioning motion. From this dened position the drive is then moved over time to the actual desired position.
3.2.2.2. Direct positioning

Today, direct positioning of the drive can move from any position directly to the next.
Indirect positioning can also be set on the Shutter Actuators with positioning for reasons of compatibility with older components.
Travel time Important is the entry of the total travel time of the drive from top to bottom or from bottom to top. This ensures that the highest possible accuracy is achieved. As it is not possible to distinguish between upward and downward motion, the mean value of both times is used. Practical application has shown that there is a slight difference between both times. The run times should be determined by measurement and entered in the parameters of the Shutter Actuator. If an upper or lower end position is reached, the timer is again set to zero.
Should you only move between the positions without ever reaching an end limit, there is a danger of inaccuracy. This case will practically never occur in practice. If this is the case however, reference run Movement to the end limit can be activated via a KNX telegram.
In an ofce building a reference run should be undertaken at least twice a day to ensure the highest possible level of accuracy. The reference run is initiated using a timer program before work starts at 6:45 a.m. and during lunch break at 12:45 p.m. These times have been selected to run this function outside of normal working hours. The reference run is ended when the drives return to the original position. This can be set in the parameters, it ensures that the previous state is re-established.
26
Control functions
Positioning of the louvres In addition to the shutter height, the louvres can also be moved to a dened angle. As in Chapter 2.1 Switching of one or more positions, the louvre positioning is achieved by stepwise motion of the drive.
Motor voltage
1st button push for louvre adjustment
2st button push for louvre adjustment
Louvre adjustment time Time
Fig. 19: Stepwise motion of the louvre adjustment
Louvre adjustment with MDRC Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x With the MDRC Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x, the switch on duration of the louvre adjustment and the number of stages from fully closed to fully open can be set. The shorter the switch-on duration, the more exact the positioning. The number of steps must be deduced by testing. Louvre adjustment with the Shutter Actuator Module of the Room Controller RC/A 8.1 With the Shutter Actuator Module of the Room Controller RC/A 8.1, the total motion time of the Louvre adjustment is parameterised. The number of louvre steps is also determined here. Multiplied with the switch-on duration, this results in the overall motion time of the Louvre adjustment.
If the drive is blocked, e.g. shutter has frozen in place or there is an obstacle, it is not possible to detect this from the Shutter Actuator due to a lack of status feedback. There is an undened relation between the position of the drive and the detected time. After removal of the block and movement to the end limit position, the position is once again clear and the timer is reset to 0.
3.2.2.3. Implementation with intelligent drives

Intelligent drives where there is a direct position feedback have only recently become available. For further information see: Chapter 2.1.4.1 Status messages or www.smi-group.com
27
Control functions
3.3.
Sensor-dependent control
Sensor dependent control is a very important function in the eld of intelligent installations. This functionality is contained in the software of the Shutter Actuator and serves the needs of safety, economy and comfort. A differentiation is made between: Weather-dependent control Temperature dependent control
3.3.1. Weather-dependent control

The forces of nature act directly on an external shutter or sun screen. These forces can be damaging for the shutter, blinds or the drive: Wind, e.g. damage to the sun screen Rain, e.g. the sun screen or the awning made of fabric may not become wet; there is a danger of damage from mildew Frost, e.g. the service life of the fabric is reduced and there is a danger that all mechanical parts will freeze solid, e.g. in the guide rails Safety-relevant sensors are very important even with electrically operated windows and skylights: Wind, there is a danger of wind damage to the window, e.g. due to the sail effect Rain, ingress of water in the building Changes in the weather can be detected by safety-relevant sensors from ABB and the drive (e.g. sun screen) can be controlled as required. The response to the weather is set directly in the Shutter Actuators.
The sun screen in a school should be moved to a predetermined position if a dened brightness value is exceeded. The sun screen will re-open if the brightness value falls below the threshold. If it is very windy, the sun screen may not be deployed for safety reasons. The corresponding telegram from the brightness sensor, 1 bit if the set brightness value is undershot or overshot, is linked with the UP/DOWN object or the position object with Shutter Actuator. The value 0 of the telegram raises the drive, the value 1 lowers it.
Safety functions are used with wind, rain and frost. Wind monitoring in particular is required for most systems. For this reason, this function is already integrated into the Shutter Actuators, i.e. there are separate communication objects in existence here. An important basic principle is that the safety functions have a higher priority than classis basic functions. If a safety event occurs, these functions are inhibited, e.g. on-site operation. Furthermore, the drive moves to a freely selectable safety position, e.g. close window with rain or raise shutter with wind.
28
Control functions
In the Shutter Actuator, a sequence of priority can be dened in addition to the functions wind, rain, frost, forced operation and blocking. In order to achieve safe communication between the Weather Station and the Shutter Actuator, the signals between both devices are monitored. For this purpose it is necessary that a data telegram is cyclically sent from the sensor on the bus. The Shutter Actuator expects this signal regularly. If it does not arrive, the drive is brought to the safety position
3.3.1.1. Wind monitor

As the wind is one of the greatest threats for a sun screen, the possible settings are shown using the wind monitor.
Weather sensor
Shutter actuator
0: no wind 1: wind, threshold value exceeded cyclic every 20 s Sent

GA 3/ 3/ 1
monitoring time 60 s receives on the object wind

GA 3/ 3/ 1
Fig. 20
The times can be freely set. In practice it is normally sufcient to set the cycle time of the sensor to 20 30 seconds. The monitoring time in the actuator should be programmed to double or triple time duration. This ensures that the safety function is not implemented immediately in case of loss of one Telegram, i.e. in an unfavourable case, strong wind and failure of the sensor, the drive then opens at the latest after the monitoring time. Furthermore, after the removal of the safety function on the parameters you can set how the drive should react. It is interesting here to set the parameters to move to saved position, i.e. the state existing beforehand, e.g. the position of the sunscreen, is reassumed.
29
Control functions
Settings in Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x parameters 1 wind monitor is active, 3 are possible Monitoring period 60 s
Fig. 21: Settings in Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x
Assignment of wind alarm no. 1 on wind monitor no. 1 Position on wind alarm: UP Position when retracted: move to saved position
Fig. 22: Setting options for every individual wind alarm, here no. 1
30
Control functions
Blocking function feature One distinctive feature is provided by the Blocking function which operates without cyclic monitoring. For this purpose, a 1 bit Blocking communication object is available. Before the drive is blocked, it can be moved UP, DOWN or to another position.
Electrically operated curtains and windows are tted on an ofce oor. In order to avoid damage, the window may not be open at the same time as the curtains are closed
The function Blocking is implemented by locking two drives to one another.
3.3.1.2. Weather-dependent sensors

At the moment, the following weather dependent sensors are available for the ABB i-bus system: Brightness Sensor HS/S 3.1 with 3 brightness threshold values
Fig. 23: Brightness Sensor HS/S 3.1
Weather Station WZ/S 1.1 with Weather Sensor WES/A 1.1
WZ/S 1.1
Us
Fig. 24: Weather Station WZ/S 1.1 with Weather Sensor WES/A 1.1
The relevant weather data mentioned above is available with the Weather Station WZ/S 4.1: Brightness from three directions, wind, rain, temperature.
31
Control functions
Weather Station WS/S 4.1 with external sensors As in principle it is a 4-fold analogue input with special software, any analogue weather sensors, i.e. 0 10 V, 0 20 mA, etc. can be used.
0V
Un
WS/S 4.1
Us L N
10
11
12
Fig. 25: Weather Station WS/S 4.1 with external sensors
Analogue Input AE/S 4.2 The software of the Analogue Input AE/S 4.2 has fewer functions that the Weather Station WS/S 4.1. The parameters are not adapted to the weather sensors.
Fig. 26: Analogue Input AE/S 4.2
32
Control functions
3.3.2. Temperature dependent control

Temperature-dependent controls are very economical, as shutters, roller blinds and awnings always are related to heat and cold protection. Heating up of the building is prevented by the reduction of the suns rays. With closed roller blinds, i.e. typical for a dwelling, the insulation effect of the window is enhanced. This reduces cooling down of the building. The following automatic functions are available: Automatic sun screening Automatic heating/cooling Night cool down
3.3.2.1. Automatic sun screening

With the Automatic sun screen there is a link between a Light Sensor and a Shutter Actuator:
Preferred sun protection position Brightness sensor Push button
No sun shutter up
Sun shutter down and louvre closing or move to position
Automatic sun protection
Fig. 27: Establishment of automatic sun screening
The Automatic sun screen function is already included in the Shutter Actuator JA/S x.x. For further information see: Product manual Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x
33
Control functions
3.3.2.2. Automatic heating/cooling

The following parameters are linked for the function Heating/cooling automatic: Sun Shutter Presence of persons Heating or cooling period
Preferred sun protection position Brightness sensor Thermostat
No sun shutter up
Sun shutter down and louvre closing or move to position
Automatic sun protection
Push button
Motion sensor
Fig. 28
This function is included in the Shutter Actuators.. For further information see: Product manual Shutter Actuators JA/S x.x
3.3.2.3. Night cool down

Using the Night cool down automatic function it is possible to implement cooling of rooms by temperature dependent ventilation.
The window of a production hall should be opened for cooling early in the morning before work starts in summer.
It is not useful to always open the window at xed times. With the climate in central Europe it may be necessary to suspend this function because of a cool day or night in summer.
34
Control functions
Implementation of night cool down The internal and external temperatures must be measured for this function: Internal temperature via thermostat; for several rooms a reference room should be selected or even the mean value of several rooms. External temperature via Weather Station. Two conditions must also be fullled: Comparator: The internal temperature is higher than the external temperature. Threshold: The external temperature is greater than a dened xed value, e.g. 18 degrees. The two conditions comparator and threshold can be detected using a Logic Module LMS 1.1.
There is an enable button and a clock with set time window. In this time period, e.g. between 5 a.m. and 6 a.m. the automatic function Night cool down occurs. With value 1 the window is opened and closed with value 0.
The principle schematic appears as follows:
Release button
Logic module
Shutter actuator
Thermostat
LM/S 1.1
Window opening/closing
internal temperature higher than external temperature
Weather sensor
AND logic
external temperature higher than 18 C
Fig. 29: Principle schematic
35
Control functions
Parameter settings and objects in the Logic Module LM/S 1.1 Two temperature comparators are required. One sends a logical 1 when the internal temperature is greater than the external temperature; the other one is inverted and sends a 0 when the external temperature is higher than the internal temperature.
Fig. 30: Logic Module LM/S 1.1, temperature comparator A
Fig. 31: Logic Module LM/S 1.1, temperature comparator B
36
Control functions
The threshold is a dened value. This is compared to the current external temperature. If it is greater for example than 18 C, the condition is fullled and logic 1 is sent. This will prevent an extreme cool down during cool nights.
Fig. 32: Logic Module LM/S 1.1, threshold function
For optimisation of this control you can also set the internal temperature to a minimum value, e.g. greater than 22 C. This will avoid night cool down with a low room temperature. For this purpose, only one further threshold function is required in the LM/S 1.1 and one additional input in the AND gate. If all conditions are fullled, the window can be opened via an AND function with a further Logic Module LM/S 1.1. If at least one condition is not fullled, the window will be closed again. Logic module objects with group addresses:
Fig. 33: Group addresses of the objects
37
Notes
38
Checklist
Roller Blind/Shutter Control

Building: Level: Room: Smallest common controlled unit no.: Function:
Intended shutter/blinds:
Internal shutter vertical Number Drive 230 V AC 24 V DC 12 V DC SMI Other Current consumption Reversal time Travel time Mechanical end limit switches Switch off via increased current No switch off via end switch or increased current Installation location Internal shading Number Drive 230 V AC 24 V DC 12 V DC SMI Other Current consumption Reversal time Travel time Mechanical end limit switches Switch off via increased current No switch off via end switch or increased current Installation location
39
Checklist
External shutter Number Drive 230 V AC 24 V DC 12 V DC SMI Other Current consumption Reversal time Travel time Mechanical end limit switches Switch off via increased current No switch off via end switch or increased current Installation location
Manual on-site operation
Conventional push button/switch with ush mounted interface 1 push button (short = lamella, long = moving) 1 push button (short = Move, long = Lamella) 1 push button, move only 1 switch operation, move only 2 push button, standard 2 switch operation, move only (roller blinds) 2 push button operation, move only (roller blinds) 2 push buttons (only Lamella) Push buttons: Additional functions: Other free rocker used for Status feedback via LED Orientation light Bus push button
Make: Design: Other free rocker used for Additional functions: Status feedback via LED Orientation light
Number of assigned push buttons Installation locations
40
Checklist
Superior manual operation
Central operation Central UP Central DOWN Superior group circuit Number of groups Function Integration into manually controlled scenes Number of scenes Behaviour with scene call
Automatic control on-site
Controlled with other events on-site

Superior automatic control
Automatic sun screen on sun No reaction DOWN UP STOP Predened position Position setting via superior control Automatic sun screen no sun No reaction DOWN UP STOP Predened position Heating/cooling automatic Heating + sun no reaction DOWN UP STOP Predened position Heating + no sun no reaction DOWN UP STOP Predened position
41
Checklist
Cooling + sun No reaction DOWN UP STOP Predened position Cooling + no sun No reaction DOWN UP STOP Predened position Timer Weekly timer program Yearly timer program Number of daily sequences Number of special days Twilight switch lx Move UP at lx Move DOWN at Integration into automatically controlled scenes Number of scenes Behaviour with scene call Controlled with other superior events
42
Checklist
Safety functions
Behaviour on wind alarm Deactivated (does not react to wind alarm) Activated no reaction (movement is ended and then blocked) Activated UP Activated DOWN Activated STOP Behaviour on frost alarm Deactivated (does not react to frost alarm) Activated no reaction (movement is ended and then blocked) Activated UP Activated DOWN Activated STOP Behaviour on rain alarm Deactivated (does not react to rain alarm) Activated no reaction (movement is ended and then blocked) Activated UP Activated DOWN Activated STOP Priorities of weather alarms
Wind alarm Rain alarm Frost alarm
Behaviour when blocked (e.g. for cleaning) Deactivated (does not react to block) Activated no reaction (movement is ended and then blocked) Activated UP Activated DOWN Activated STOP Activated move to position (blind-shutter height/louvre setting) Enable forced operation Priorities of the safety functions
Weather alarm Block Forced operation
43
Checklist
Operation/display at a remote location
Remote controlled Via telephone Via LAN Via Internet Status message On visualisation system Query via telephone Query via LAN Query via Internet
Special functions
Integration in occupancy simulation Inhibit on-site operation at certain times Times: Behaviour on inhibit removal UP DOWN State as beforehand As last attempted manual on-site operation Inhibit on-site operation for certain events/states Events: Allow only UP movement at certain times Allow only DOWN movement at certain times Switch from certain points with higher priority (forced operation)
Behaviour on priority removal UP DOWN State as beforehand As last attempted manual on-site operation
Partition function As an open partition common control with
44
Contact
www.abb.com/knx
Note: We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the contents of this document without prior notice. With regard to purchase orders, the agreed particulars shall prevail. ABB AG does not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or possible lack of information in this document. We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter and illustrations contained therein. Any reproduction, disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents - in whole or in parts - is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AG. Copyright 2009 ABB All rights reserved
Order Number 2CDC 500 057 M0201 (05/09)
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 072 R0011
Technical data Power supply Bus voltage Current consumption, bus Leakage loss, bus EIB / KNX Programming LED Programming button IP 20 II Overvoltage category Pollution degree SELV 24 V DC Operation Storage Transport Maximum air humidity Modular installation device (MDRC) Dimensions Mounting width in space units Mounting depth On 35 mm mounting rail as required 0.1 kg Plastic housing, grey EIB / KNX to EN 50 090-1, -2 in accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline Certification 5C + 45C 25C + 55C 25C + 70C 93 %, no condensation allowed Modular installation device, ProM 90 x 36 x 64.5 mm (H x W x D) 2, 2 modules at 18 mm 64.5 mm to DIN EN 60 715 21 32 V DC < 12 mA Max. 250 mW via bus connection terminals for assignment of the physical address for assignment of the physical address to DIN EN 60 529 to DIN EN 61 140 III to DIN EN 60 664-1 2 to DIN EN 60 664-1
Connections Operating and display elements Enclosure
10
Safety class Isolation category EIB / KNX safety extra low voltage Temperature range
2CDC 071 279 F0005
The Application Unit Logic is a rail mounted device for insertion in the distribution board. The device contains logical function with the possibility of individual parameter parameterisation. Furthermore, timers with on and off delays and pulse duration, staircase lighting functions and comparators are available.
The device is ready for operation after connection to the bus voltage. The Application Logic Unit is parameterised via the ETS3. The connection to the bus is established using the front side bus connection terminal.
10
Ambient conditions Design
Installation Mounting position Weight Housing/colour Approvals CE mark
ABL/S 2.1
Page 1 of 4 ABLS_21_TD_EN_V1-0 2CDC 509 037 D0201
ABL/S 2.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Application program Logic Time 254EA/2
Max. number of communication objects 254
Max. number of group addresses 254
Max. number of associations 254
Note:
ETS3 is required for programming. A .VD3 type file must be imported. The application program is available in the ETS3 at ABB/controller/controller. See the product manual Application Unit Logic ABL/S 2.1 for a detailed description of the application program. The manual is available free of charge on the Internet at www.abb.de/eib.
10
10
ABL/S 2.1
ABL/S 2.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Circuit diagram
10
2CDC 072 053 F0006
1 Label carrier 2 Programming button
3 Programming LED 4 Bus connection terminal
10
Dimension drawing
ABL/S 2.1
ABL/S 2.1
2CDC 072 051 F0006
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Notes
10
10
ABL/S 2.1
ABL/S 2.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Battery Module, 12 VDC, MDRC AM/S 12.1, GH Q631 0062 R0111
1
Sealed lead acid battery module for maintaining the ABB i-bus system voltage (for up to a minimum of 10 minutes) in case of a mains failure in connection with the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply SU/S 30.640.1. Connection is made via standard cables. The Battery Module is for DIN rail mounting device and can easily be snapped onto the mounting rail beneath the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply. The back-up time is dependent on the bus load, however, a minimum of 10 minutes is guaranteed when the EIB line is at capacity (64 bus devices). With integrated PTC temperature sensor for monitoring the charging voltage and integrated fuse. The temperature sensor must always be connected to ensure that the battery is charged correctly!
Technical data Power supply Power supply May only be connected to the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply 12 V DC 1 Ah 150 mA max. 10 h min. 10 minutes (dependent on bus load; the back-up time can be reduced due to aging of the battery module) Integrated Self-healing (integrated) 2 screw terminals 2 screw terminals Cable cross-section: multi-core 0.2 2.5 mm2 single-core 0.2 4.0 mm2 + 5 C ... + 45 C 25 C ... + 20 C 25 C ... + 50 C
SK 0038 B02
Nominal voltage Battery capacity Charging current Charging time Mains failure back-up time
Safety Operating and display elements Connections
Temperature sensor Fuse None Power supply Temperature sensor
Type of protection Ambient temperature range
Design Housing, colour Mounting Dimensions Mounting depth/width Weight CE norm
IP 20, EN 60 529 Operation Storage Transport Modular installation device, pro M Plastic housing, grey On 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60 715 90 x 144 x 64 mm (H x W x D) 68 mm/8 modules at 18 mm 0.72 kg In accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline
AM/S 12.1
Page 1 of 2 AMS_121_TD_EN_V2-1 2CDC 501 017 D0201
AM/S 12.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Battery Module, 12 VDC, MDRC AM/S 12.1, GH Q631 0062 R0111
1
Dimension drawing
58 43.5 6.5
1 2 3 4
1
144
q
150 mA Code
12V
AM/S 12.1
OK
90
45
ABB i-bus EIB
Un= 12 V DC
Wiring diagram
Code / 150 mA 650 mA
12V Reset
10
30V DC
2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
150 mA Code
12V
OK
Un= 12 V DC
1 Label Carrier 2 Battery connection + 3 Code (temperature sensor )
4 Battery 150 mA 5 Connection for temperature sensor
Planning and application
Device implementation The following guidelines should be observed when using the Battery Module AM/S 12.1: 1. The Battery Module may only be connected to the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply. 2. The Battery Module may only be installed on a horizontal mounting rail (35 mm, EN 50 022) in a wallmounted distribution board. 3. The Battery Module may not be connected in series or in parallel to other Battery Modules or other sealed lead acid batteries. 4. In the supplied state, the Battery Module is charged or partially charged. The Battery Module must not be stored in a discharged state.
If the Battery Module is stored for longer periods without connection to the Uninterruptible EIB Power Supply, it must be fully charged at least every 6 months. The Battery Module can be stored for max. 2 years at a storage temperature of 20 C. 5. Once the Battery Module has been discharged during normal operation, it must be recharged as soon as possible. 6. Due to the life span of the sealed lead acid battery, it is advisable to replace the Battery Module with a new device approx. every four years. Used Battery Modules can be returned to your EIB representive for disposal.
AM/S 12.1
Page 2 of 2 AMS_121_TD_EN_V2-1 2CDC 501 017 D0201
AM/S 12.1
S 0080 Z99
SK 0034 Z02
Project : PRINCESS NORA BINT ABDULRAHMAN UNIVERSITY - PACKAGE 1 Building : 2.1.0 School of Medicine Subject: EIB/KNX Lighting Control System
BILL OF QUANTITIES
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Description Uninterruptible EIB power supply 640 mA, MDRC, SU/S 30.640.1 Battery Module, 12 V DC, MDRC, AM/S 12.1 Line Coupler, MDRC, LK/S 4.1 USB Interface, MDRC, USB/S 1.1 IP Router, IPR/S 2.1 Power Supply Units, MDRC, NT/S 12.1600 Application Unit logic ABL/S 2.1 Bus Connection Terminals, BUSKLEMME, (Red / Black) Brightness sensor HS/S 3.1 Switch Actuator, 2-fold, 16 A, MDRC, SA/S 2.16.1 Switch Actuator, 4-fold, 16 A, MDRC, SA/S 4.16.1 Switch Actuator, 8-fold, 16 A, MDRC, SA/S 8.16.1 Switch Actuator, 12-fold, 16 A, MDRC, SA/S 12.16.1 Shutter Actuator, 8-fold, 230 V AC, MDRC, JA/S 8.230.1 EIB Touchpanel SMARTtouch, color, 6136/100 C-102-500 Cover Frame for LEAN-/SMARTtouch, Dark Glass, 6136/11-500 Wall Box for Touchpanels, 6136/UP EIB Bus Coupler, FM, 6120-U-102-500 EIB Presence Detector, FM, 6131-74-102-500, (Alpine White) Surface Mounted Base for Presence Detector, 6885-500 MF Switch Sensor, 4-fold, FM, 6127 MF, (Solo) Cover Frame for Switch Sensor, 1721 OPC Server software S03.03.5.20.03 IP Driver ( IP Router is ABB IPR/S) PC (DELL OPTIPLEX 755 ) Qty. 30 30 29 1 2 2 26 200 10 7 3 6 83 39 1 1 1 577 514 514 63 63 1 1
EIB Control Panels 1 2 EIB Mini-Center Panels 48 Modules (Type code: GDMS348 RX) EIB Mini-Center Panels 80 Modules (Type code: GDMS380 RX) 41 41
Project : PRINCESS NORA BINT ABDULRAHMAN UNIVERSITY - PACKAGE 1 Building : 2.1.0 School of Medicine Subject: Lighting Control details including all corridors
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W Normal Circuit Number 1 3 5 3 Ckt-1 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 Scullery-B305 Scullery-B306 2.7 2.7 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 6 7 5 Ckt-1 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 Prosection Area, B-340 and Cadavar Cold Storage Unit, B-341 7 12 9 7 Ckt-1 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 2 11 2 Lockers, B-302 8 5 11 2 2 Histology Hall, B-300 7 12 12 Ckt-5 @ ECB-SM/B4-1 10 1 10 1 10 1 10 1
L W LRP-SM/G1-1 ELP-SM/G1-1 PP-SM/G1-1
Emergency Circuit Number
Power Circuit Number
Control Type
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @ Basement Floor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Anatomy Dissection Hall, B-310
13
12
Anatomy Dissection Hall, B-330
13
12
Lockers, B-301
2 Ckt-1 @ ECB-SM/B4-1
Toilet - B030 Instuctor -b353 Technicianav room-b352 Suppervisor-b351 Cadaver handler-b350
Switching - a Switching - a Switching - a Switching Emergency-a Switching Emergency Switching Switching emergency Switching Switching emergency Switching-a Switching-a Switching-a Switching Emergency Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching - b Switching emergency Switching emergency Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching Emergency Switching - d Switching - e Switching - f Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Switching Emergency Switching Switching emergency Switching - a Switching - d Switching - b Switching - d Switching - c Switching - b Switching - a Switching - d Total: Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching - g Switching - d Switching - e Switching - b Switching - h 1 of 22
1 1
5 1 1 1 1 27 2
Panel Board @ Ground Floor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
19 Large Classroom-G540 10 13.2
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W Normal Circuit Number Emergency Circuit Number 1 5 8 2 3 Power Circuit Number Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching Emergency - a 1 Switching Emergency - b 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 4 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - g 1 Switching - d 1 Switching - e 1 Switching - d 1 4 2 Switching - h 1 Switching Emergency - c 1 Switching Emergency - d 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 4 Switching Conventional Switch Switching Conventional Switch Switching - a 1 1 Switching emergency - a 1 Switching 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching emergency - b 1 Switching 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching - a 1 6 Switching emergency - a 1 Conventional Switch Switching Conventional Switch Switching emergency Conventional Switch Switching Conventional Switch Switching Conventional Switch Switching emergency Switching - a 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching emergency - e 1 Control Type Remarks / Comments
EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @ Basement Floor 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 Large Classroom-G535 10 13.2 1 9 10 15 Store- G523 Store- G510 Security Operation- G522 Tutorial - G507 Meeting-G516 Meeting-G514 Meeting-G513 Meeting-G512 Meeting-G511 Meeting-G510 Toilet - G040 Elec - G043 Jan - G041 IDF - G042 Tutorial-G520 5.1 5.4 5.1 5 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 5.4 5.5 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 22 5 3 5 3 7 2 7 2 7 2 7 6 7 6 7 6 9 7 9 11 9 9 11 2 3 2 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W 5 5.5 Normal Circuit Number 2 3 Tutorial-G521 5.1 5.4 5 3 Tutorial-G506 5 5.5 5 3 4 Small Classroom-G503 8 7 5 Ckt-2 @ PP-SM/G1-2 4 Small Classroom-G502 8 10 5 Ckt-12 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Provision Library (Library G-400) Corridor - G075 Stiars-1, GS01 Stiars-1, GS01
L W LRP-SM/G2-1
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
Tutorial-G505
22 4 4
17 53 26
12
11 Ckt-7 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Ckt-9 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Ckt-10 @ PP-SM/G1-2 Ckt-7 @ ECB-SM/G1-1 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/G1-1
ELP-SM/G2-1 PP-SM/G2-1
Switch Number Number Presence Remarks / Comments Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching - c 1 1 Switching - d 1 Switching emergency - d 1 Switching - c 1 1 Switching - d 1 Switching emergency - f 1 Switching - b 1 1 Switching - e 1 Switching emergency - c 1 Switching a 1 Switching c 1 1 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency - c 1 2 1 Switching Emergency - d 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 6 4 Window Curtain 2 2 Window Curtain 2 1 Window Curtain 2 Al-ways On Switching Emergency 1 Al-ways On Switching Emergency 1 Total: 38 12 69 26 Control Type Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching - g Switching - d Switching - e Switching - f Switching - h Switching Emergency - a Switching Emergency - h Projector Circuit Projector Screen Projector Circuit Projector Screen Window Curtain Switching a Switching b Switching c Switching g Switching d Switching e Switching f Switching h Switching Emergency - a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
21 Large Classroom-G530 10 13.2 1 4 6 13 16
23 Large Classroom-G610 10 13 1 3 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W Normal Circuit Number Emergency Circuit Number 1 9 11 15 3 Open Computer Lab-G606 5.6 10 3 25 25 Store-G604 Meeting-G605 5.3 6 3 5 3 Meeting-G602 5 3.2 19 5 Meeting-G603 5 3.2 19 5 2 Small Classroom-G501 7.8 7 5 23 Toilet - G010 Elec - G013 IDF - G012 4 Ckt-8 @ ECB-SM/G1-1 4 4 4 4 6 Power Circuit Number Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching Emergency - d 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 4 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 2 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching Conventional Switch Switching - a 1 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency - b 1 Switching - b 1 1 1 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency - b 1 Switching - a 1 1 1 Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 1 1 Switching Emergency - d 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching - a 1 5 Switching Emergency - a 1 Conventional Switch Switching Conventional Switch Switching Emergency Conventional Switch Switching Conventional Switch Switching Emergency Switching - a 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - e 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - d 1 Switching - e 1 4 2 Switching Emergency 1 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching Conventional Switch Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Control Type Remarks / Comments
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75
18 Large Classroom-G601 9 13 6 Ckt-9 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Ckt-11 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Store-G604 Corridor - G009 Corridor - G005 Corridor - G008 27 24 31 5 5.3 4.4 18 Ckt-24 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Ckt-25 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Ckt-27 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Ckt-15 @ PP-SM/G2-2 4 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W 20 4 54 4
L W
Normal Circuit Number
Power Circuit Number Ckt-12 @ PP-SM/G2-2 Ckt-10 @ PP-SM/G2-2
EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @ 76 Corridor - Basement G071 Floor
77
Corridor - G073/ 75
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 2 2 Total: 31 11 54 38 Control Type Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching - e Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - a Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Projector Circuit Projector Screen Window Curtain Switching - a Switching emergency - a Switching - h Switching - b Switching emergency Switching - f Switching emergency Switching - e Switching emergency Switching - d Switching emergency Switching - c Switching emergency Switching - b Switching Switching emergency Switching - g Switching emergency Switching - h Switching emergency - f Switching - g Switching Switching emergency Switching - f Switching emergency - c Switching - f Switching emergency - e Switching - c Switching - g Switching emergency - d Switching - d Switching emergency - c 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
LRP-SM/G3-1
ELP-SM/G3-1
PP-SM/G3-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
24 Large Classroom - G210 10 13 1 14 17 16 Copy Center - G027 Reception Counter- G114 ST Reg AA - G115 ST Reg Dir - G113 ST Reg Off - G112 ST AF Off - G111 ST AF Off - G110 ST AF Dir - G131 ST AF Co Dir - G130 AA-G726+G727+G728+729+G730 AD AF OFF-G130 AD AF OFF-G120 AC AF OFF-G101 AC AF OFF-G100 ASSMT OFF -G132 6.6 3 3 6 5 4.5 4.5 5 4.5 10 4.3 4 4 4.5 4.5 7.5 3.5 3.5 5 3 3 3 4.6 3.4 5 3.4 3.4 3.4 4.5 4.2 7 9 9 9 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 9 6 9 6 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 11 4 5 of 22 7
S.N Load Served Area ASSMT OFF -G133 Area dimensions L W 4.5 4.5 5.6 4 4.6 2.5 4.2 6 4 7.6 5 5 Normal Circuit Number 11 11 4 PC Tech -G223 IT MGR - G222 AV Tech - G221 AA - G220 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number Control Type Switching - c Switching emergency - b Switching - a Switching -b Switching emergency - a Switching - d Switching emergency - d Switching - c Switching emergency - c Switching - b Switching emergency - b Switching - a Switching emergency - a Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching - d Switching - e Switching Emergency Switching Emergency Projector Circuit Projector Screen Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching Switching - a Switching Emergency Switching Switching Switching Emergency Switching Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching - b Switching emergency Switching - c Switching - d Switching emergency Switching - a Switching emergency - a Switching Switching emergency Switching Switching Switching emergency Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Total:
EIB-LRP-SM/G4-1 @ Ground Floor L W LRP-SM/G4-1 ELP-SM/G4-1 PP-SM/4-1
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
ASSMT MTG -G134
Large Classroom - G201
9.5
13
3 8 9
Store - G224 Toilet - G020 Jan - G021 IDF - G022 LV Panels - G025 Meeting Room - G202 5 3.5 -
4 6 9 6 6 4 6 4 8 3
Meeting Room - G203 Computer Lab-G150 Hallway-G091 Corridor-G090 Hallway-G093 Corridor - G086 Corrdior - G088
5 4 1.5 20 15.5 2.6 25
3.5 6 15.5 5.5 1.5 19.7 5.5
8 3 12 7 18 & 20 9 19 & 21 18 & 20 4 18 Ckt-14 @ PP-SM/G3-2 Ckt-9 @ PP-SM/G3-2
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 Conventional Switch 1 6 1 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 42 7 81 2 18
Remarks / Comments
6 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W Normal Circuit Number 1 1 5 6 Meeting Room - G321 5.2 3.2 3 1 Meeting Room - G322 5.2 3.2 3 1 5 Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency 1 4 2 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching - a 1 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching - c 1 1 1 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 4 2 Switching - e 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 4 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 2 Switching - c 1 Switching emergency - a 1 6 2 Switching 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching - a 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching - c 1 1 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching - g 1 1 Switching - h 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching - e 1 1 Switching - f 1 Control Type Remarks / Comments
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
Large Classroom - G320
9.5
13.2
18 Large Classroom - G315 10 13.2 5 14 18 23 Prep-G309 Toilet G030 Meeting Room - G323 Meeting Room - G324 Tutorial - G304 3 3 5.2 4.6 4.6 6 11.2 3.2 3 1 8 ELP-SM/G-21 12 17 12 2 3 Tutorial - G303 5.2 6 2 3 Tutorial - G307 5.2 6 2 3 Tutorial - G308 5.2 6 2 7 of 22
7 17
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W Normal Circuit Number 1 5 Tutorial - G302 5.2 6 1 5 Tutorial - G305 5.2 6 1 5 Tutorial - G306 5.2 6 1 5 4 6 Emergency Circuit Number 3 5.2 6 Power Circuit Number Control Type Switching Emergency Switching - e Switching - f Switching emergency - a Switching - a Switching - c Switching emergency - a Switching - a Switching - g Switching emergency - b Switching - b Switching - d Switching emergency - b Switching - a Switching - b Switching - a Switching - d Switching Emergency - b Switching Emergency - c Switching Emergency - a Switching Emergency - b Switching Emergency Projector Circuit Projector Screen Projector Circuit Projector Screen Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Switching Emergency Switching Emergency Total: Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - a Switching - d Switching Emergency - b Switching - e Switching emergency - e Switching - d Switching emergency - d Switching - c Switching emergency - c Switching - b Switching emergency - b Switch Number Number Presence Remarks / Comments Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Always On 1 Always On 1 38 8 73 26 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
Tutorial - G301
Science Lab -G310
11.2
24
6 Ckt-5 @ ECB-SM/G4-1 Ckt-19 @ PP-SM/ G2-1 Ckt-21 @ PP-SM/ G2-1 Ckt-12 @ PP-SM/ G4-2 27 28 29 34 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/G4-1 Ckt-5 @ ECB-SM/G4-1
Corridor - G080 4 Corridor - G083 Stair-4 Stair-4

L W LRP-SM/G11-1
54
Panel Board @ First Floor
ELP-SM/G11-1
PP-SM/11-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Copy Center-1434 SGL OFF-1429 SGL OFF - 1431 SGL OFF - 1432 DBL OFF-1512 DBL OFF-1422 DBL OFF-1424 DBL OFF-1426
2.5 2.7 3 3 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.2
5.5 5.5 4.2 4.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2
3 5 3 5 3 3 3 3 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A 8 of 22
S.N Load Served Area DBL OFF-1428 Area dimensions L W 5.2 3.2 Normal Circuit Number 5 Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number N/A Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching - a 1 1 Switching emergency - a 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 2 1 Switching - d 1 Switching c Emergency 1 Window Curtain 2 Switching - a 1 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching emergency - d 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 1 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching Conventional Switch Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 4 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 2 Switching - a 1 Switching Emergency - b 1 Switching Emergency - c 1 4 1 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching Conventional Switch Switching - c 1 1 Switching emergency - c 1 Switching - b 1 1 Switching emergency - b 1 Switching - a 1 1 Switching emergency -a 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 1 Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - c 1 Switching - a 1 6 Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency 1 Conventional Switch Switching Switching Emergency Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Switching Switching Emergency Conventional Switch Control Type Remarks / Comments
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
4 7
Anatomy Physology Prep - 1410
13.2
3.3 11 Ckt-8 @ PP-SM/11-2 9 2 11
Meeting-1421
5.2
6.5
Small Classrooms - 1439
8.2
7.2
6 18
Storage-1440
11 13
Anatomy Physology Dry Lab 1409
12.7
10
11 Ckt 5 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Ckt-11 @ PP-SM/11-2 Ckt-8 @ PP-SM/11-2 15 6
Anatomy Physology Dry Lab 1512
10
13.5
Ckt 7 @ ECB-SM/11-1 2
Stor-1430 SGL OFF-1423 SGL OFF-1425 SGL OFF-1427 5.1 5.1 5.1 3.3 3.2 3.2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 3
AA - 1435 TO 1438
8.7
Toilet - 1010 Elec - 1011 IDF -1012
29 Ckt-10 @ ECB-SM/11-1 29 2 29 2 9 of 22
S.N Load Served Area LV PANEL -1018 Toilet - 1040 Elec - 1042 IDF -1043 Study-1401 Study-1402 Study-1403 Study-1404 Study-1405 Study-1406 Prayer 1550 Corridor - 1008 Corridor - 1070 Corridor - 1076 SGL OFF -1403 SGL OFF -1404 Chair -1405 SGL OFF -1406 SGL OFF -1407
L W
Area dimensions L W
Normal Circuit Number 29 6
Control Type Switching Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Switching Switching Emergency Switching Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - f Switching Emergency - f
69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Ckt-9 @ ECB-SM/11-1 6 7 6 7 6.3 3 3.2 3 3 6.3 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 9 8 9 8 9 10 17 10 17 10 17 30 19 21 6 3 1 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 1 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 1 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 1 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 1 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1
LRP-SM/G12-1 ELP-SM/G12-1 PP-SM/12-1
Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - f Switching Emergency - f Total: Switching - a Switching - b Switching - c Switching - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - a Switching Emergency - b Switching Emergency Projector Circuit Projector Screen Window Curtain Switching - a Switching Emergency - b
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 6 1 1 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Conventional Switch 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 52 5 81 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Remarks / Comments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 Anatomy & Physiology Dry Lab 1502
13
10
1 Ckt 5 @ ECB-SM/11-1 8 13 3 3
Anatomy & Physiology Dry Lab -
10 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Lab Area dimensions L W 13 10 Normal Circuit Number Emergency Circuit Number Ckt 5 @ ECB-SM/11-1 12 15 5 Power Circuit Number Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching Emergency 1 4 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 2 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 4 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 2 Switching 1 2 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching Conventional Switch Switching - a 1 2 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching - a 1 2 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching 1 0 Switching 1 Switching - a 1 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Switching - b 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching 1 Switching emergency 1 1 Window Curtain 2 Window Curtain 2 Window Curtain 2 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 4 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency 1 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 2 Switching a 1 Switching a 1 Control Type Remarks / Comments
EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @& Basement Floor Physiology Dry 14 Anatomy
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
1503
Anatomy & Physiology Wet Lab 1808
10.2
18
2 6 Ckt 6 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Ckt-10 @ UPP/SM11-2 Ckt-12 @ PP/SM12-4 7
Anatomy & Physiology PREP 1806 Store - 1804 Anatomy & Physiology PREP 1510 Anatomy & Physiology PREP 1509 Biology Supplies Storage - 1506 Office - 1504 Anatomy & Physiology prep - 1505
15.5
3.5 7 9
6 7
10.4 10.4 13.2 5.5 8
3.2 3.2 10.3 3.2 3.2
6 11 4 15 30 15 5 15 5 25 & 27 Ckt-4 @ ECB-SM/11-1
Corridor-1004
26
6.7
Ckt-15 @ PP/SM12-3 Ckt-17 @ PP/SM12-3 Ckt-18 @ PP/SM12-3 4
Anatomy & Physiology Wet Lab 1802
12.2
18
6 6 7 Ckt-10 @ PP/SM12-3 Ckt-8 @ PP/SM12-3 8 20
Anatomy & Physiology Dry Lab -
11 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Lab Area dimensions L W 10 13.5 Normal Circuit Number Emergency Circuit Number 4 Ckt 7 @ ECB-SM/11-1 Ckt-7 @ PP/SM12-5 Stor-1507 Corridor - 1002 Corridor - 1005 20 24.5 6
L
EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @& Basement Floor Physiology Dry 65 Anatomy
66 67 68 69 70 71
1508
5.5 20
W LRP-SM/G13-1 ELP-SM/G13-1
Ckt-12 @ PP/SM12-5 Ckt-17 @ PP/SM12-5

PP-SM/13-1
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching Emergency 1 4 1 Switching Emergency 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Switching 1 1 Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Total: 32 8 56 28 Control Type Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching - a Switching emergency-a Swicthing Swicthing Switching emergency Swicthing Switching emergency Switching - f Switching - f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 6 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
DBL OFF -1201 DBL OFF -1202 DBL OFF -1203 DBL OFF -1204 DBL OFF -1205 SGL OFF-1210 SGL OFF-1211 SGL OFF-1212 SGL OFF-1213 SGL OFF-1214 SGL OFF-1231 SGL OFF-1232 SGL OFF-1233 SGL OFF-1234
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4
Meeting-1220
7.7
2 32
Toilet - 1020 Jan - 1023 IDF - 1022 LV Panels - 1028
7 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/14-1 7 7 4 7 4 6.2 4.7 9 12 of 22
Manager-1106
S.N Load Served Area Manager-1106 Area dimensions L W 6.2 4.7 Normal Circuit Number Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 Switching - g 1 Switching Emergency -e 1 Switching - e 1 1 Switching Emergency - d 1 Swicthing 1 1 Swicthing 1 1 Switching - d 1 Switching - c 1 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Window Curtain 2 Switching - a 1 1 Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Switching - c 1 1 Switching Emergency - a 1 Switching - c 1 1 Switching Emergency - c 1 Switching - a 1 1 Switching Emergency - f 1 Switching - a 1 1 Switching Emergency - i 1 Switching - a 1 1 1 Switching emergency 1 Switching - a 1 Switching - b 1 Switching - c 1 Switching - d 1 2 1 Switching - e 1 Switching Emergency -e 1 Projector Circuit 1 Projector Screen 2 Window Curtain 2 Swicthing - a 1 1 Switching Emergency -e 1 Switching - b 1 1 Switching Emergency -d 1 Window Curtain 2 Switching - b 1 Switching - a 1 1 1 Switching Emergency -c 1 Window Curtain 2 swicthing - a 1 1 Swicthing - a 1 1 Switching Emergency -b 1 Window Curtain 2 Swicthing 0 1 Switching - a 1 1 Switching - f 1 Switching Emergency - f 1 Switching - b 1 1 Switching Emergency - g 1 Control Type Remarks / Comments
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93
7 Asst Dean-1100 WC -1101 WC -1102 Dean Office -1108 5 2.2 2.2 6 4.6 2 2 5.7 9 7 9 11 9 Ckt-33 @ PP-SM/13-1 ST Reg Off & Reception -1121 ST Reg Off -1120 Assco Dean -1103 Manager-1107 AA-1223 to 1228 Copy Center-1027 5.7 4.7 4.7 5.5 8.2 6.6 5 3 4.4 4.7 7 7.5 9 7 9 7 9 7 11 7 2 3 6 6
8 Dean's Meeting - 1130 9 6 9 Ckt-29 @ PP-SM/13-1 Ckt-33 @ PP-SM/13-1 Dean Reception-1123 Dean Pantry-1125 4.5 4.5 8 3.2 12 Conf-1124 WC Dean Loung-1113 Store-1209 DBL OFF -1206 DBL OFF -1207 4.5 2 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 2 5.5 3 3.2 26 26 1 26 4.5 3.2 1 13 of 22 12 12 9 Ckt-33 @ PP-SM/13-1 9 Ckt-33 @ PP-SM/13-1 10 11 12 9 Ckt-33 @ PP-SM/13-1 N/A
S.N Load Served Area DBL OFF -1208 SGL OFF-1215 SGL OFF-1216 SGL OFF-1217 Store-1218 SGL OFF-1229 Chair - 1238 SGL OFF -1237 SGL OFF -1236 SGL OFF -1235 Corridor - 1084 Corridor - 1095 Dean AA-1111 Dean AA-1112 MGR AA-1110 CONF-1109 AA-1126 AA-1122 A Dean AA-1105 A Dean AA-1104 Area dimensions L W 4.5 4 4 4 4 3.7 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 26 3 3 3 4.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
L
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 4 7 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 5.3 3 3 4.2 4.3 2.8 2.8 2.8 4.3
W
Normal Circuit Number 26 28
Control Type Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Swicthing Switching - i Switching Emergency - i Switching - d Switching Emergency - h Switching - c Switching Emergency - g Switching - b Switching Emergency - f Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Switching Emergency - g Switching Emergency - f Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - i Switching Emergency - a Switching Emergency - b Switching Emergency - c Swicthing - d Switching Emergency - d Total: Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Swicthing Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - c
1 3 28 3 28 3 28 28 3 30 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 13 15 15 25 11 11 10 11 10 11 11 11 11 10 11
LRP-SM/G14-1 ELP-SM/G14-1 PP-SM/G14-1
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 63 5 112 22 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
DBL OFF-1305 DBL OFF-1306 DBL OFF-1307 DBL OFF-1308 Store-1309 SGL OFF -1314 SGL OFF -1315 SGL OFF -1316
4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 3.2 3.2 3.2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 14 of 22
S.N Load Served Area SGL OFF -1316 SGL OFF -1317 Store-1318 SGL OFF- 1329 Chair- 1337 SGL OFF-1333 SGL OFF-1334 SGL OFF-1335 SGL OFF-1336 SGL OFF -1402 4 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5 4 6.8 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.5 Area dimensions L W 3.5 3.2 3.5 3.2 Normal Circuit Number 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 Ckt-1 @ ELP-SM/11-1 2 Meeting-1320 7.7 6 4 Ckt-27 @ PP-SM/14-1 AA-1321 to 1325 Toilet - 1030 Elec - 1033 IDF - 1032 DBL OFF-1301 DBL OFF-1302 DBL OFF-1303 DBL OFF-1304 SGL OFF-1310 SGL OFF-1311 SGL OFF-1312 SGL OFF-1313 Chair-1332 SGL OFF-1331 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.5 3.2 8 6.7 4 2 6 Ckt- 5 @ ECB-SM/14-1 6 6 6 6 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 22 3 22 3 22 3 22 3 24 5 24 5 15 of 22 Emergency Circuit Number 3 Power Circuit Number Control Type Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Swicthing Switching - e Switching Emergency - a Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching - a Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching emergency Swicthing Switching Emergency Swicthing Switching Emergency Switching - d Switching Emergency -a Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - d Switching Emergency -i Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 6 1 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Remarks / Comments
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
S.N Load Served Area SGL OFF-1330 Chair-1230 Corridor - 1079 Area dimensions L W 4.5 4.5 6 3.2 6.5 56 Normal Circuit Number 24 24 5 16 19 25
LRP-SM/21-1 ELP-SM/21-1 PP-SM/21-1
67 68 69 70 71 72
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Switching - c 1 1 Switching Emergency - h 1 Switching - d 1 1 Switching Emergency -i 1 Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Window Curtain 1 2 Total: 39 1 64 8 Control Type Switching - e 1 Switching Emergency - e Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency - d Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - c Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency - b Switching - a 1 Switching Emergency - a Switching - a 1 Switching Emergency - a Swicthing Conventional Switch Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - c Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency - b Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency - d Switching - a 1 Switching Emergency - e Switching - d 1 Switching Emergency - d Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - c Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency - b Swicthing 1 Switching - d 1 Switching emergency - j Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - h Switching - b 1 Switching Emergency - g Switching - a 1 Switching Emergency - f Switching - e 1 Switching Emergency - j Switching - d 1 Switching emergency - h Switching - c 1 Switching Emergency - g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
Panel Board @ Second Floor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
SGL OFF - 2533 SGL OFF - 2534 SGL OFF - 2535 SGL OFF - 2536 Chair - 2537 SGL OFF -2529 Store - 2518 SGL OFF -2516 SGL OFF -2517 SGL OFF -2515 DBL OFF - 2505 DBL OFF - 2506 DBL OFF - 2507 DBL OFF - 2508 Stor - 2509 Chair -2430 SGL OFF -2530 SGL OFF -2531 Chair -2532 SGL OFF -2510 SGL OFF -2511 SGL OFF -2512
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.8 3.8 3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 6.4 3.2 3.2 6.5 3.2 3.2 3.2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 21 3 21 3 21 3 16 of 22
S.N Load Served Area SGL OFF -2513 Area dimensions L W 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.7 Normal Circuit Number 21 21 3 23 5 23 5 23 5 23 5 crk 2, LPSM/21-1 2 4 Meeting - 2520 7.7 6 4 25 Toilet - 2040 Elec - 2043 IDF - 2042 Prayer Corridor - 2009 Corridor - 2075 Corridor - 2080 4 4 25
L
Control Type Switching - b Switching Emergency - f Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching emergency - a Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching a Switching emergency Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching - a Switching Emergency Swicthing Switching Emergency Swicthing Switching Emergency
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
SGL OFF -2514 DBL OFF - 2501 DBL OFF - 2502 DBL OFF - 2503 DBL OFF - 2504 AA 2521+2522+2523+2524+2526
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 6 1 1
Remarks / Comments
6 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/21-1
16 50 20.4 2.5
W LRP-SM/22-1 ELP-SM/22-1
12 21 10 3
PP-SM/22-1
Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Window Curtain 1 Window Curtain 1 Window Curtain 1 Window Curtain 1 Total: 39 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
61 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
SGL OFF - 2410 SGL OFF - 2411 SGL OFF - 2412 SGL OFF - 2413 SGL OFF - 2414 DBL OFF - 2401 DBL OFF - 2402 DBL OFF - 2403 DBL OFF - 2404
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 3.2 3.2 3.2
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 17 of 22
Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d
S.N Load Served Area DBL OFF - 2405 Chair - 2431 SGL OFF - 2432 SGL OFF - 2433 SGL OFF - 2434 Toilet - 2010 Elec - 2013 LV Panels - 2015 IDF - 2012 AA 2423+2424+2425+2427+2428 8.2 6.7 Area dimensions L W 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.2 6.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 Normal Circuit Number 3 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 2 Ckt-9 @ ECB-SM/21-1 2 6 2 6 2 6 4 4 6 Meeting - 2420 7.7 6 2 20 SGL OFF - 2415 SGL OFF - 2416 SGL OFF - 2417 Store - 2418 SGL OFF - 2429 DBL OFF - 2406 DBL OFF - 2407 DBL OFF - 2408 Stor - 2409 SGL OFF - 2435 SGL OFF - 2436 SGL OFF - 2437 SGL OFF - 2438 Corridor - 2002 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.7 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 32 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 4 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.7 4.5 14 3 14 3 14 3 14 14 3 16 5 16 5 16 5 16 18 1 18 1 18 1 18 1 4 6 18 of 22 Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number Control Type Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Swicthing Switching Emergency Swicthing Switching Emergency Swicthing Switching Emergency Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Swicthing Switching - d Switching Emergency - j Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Swicthing Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Switching - b Switching Emergency - f Switching - c Switching Emergency - g Switching - d Switching Emergency - h Window Curtain Window Curtain Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 Remarks / Comments
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
S.N Load Served Area Area dimensions L W 4 50
L W
Normal Circuit Number
Power Circuit Number 4
EIB-LP-SM/B4-1 @ Floor 70 Corridor - Basement 2004 Panel Board @ Second Floor
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Window Curtain 1 2 Total: 36 1 58 8 Control Type Switching a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - a Switching emergency - a Swicthing Swicthing Swicthing Swicthing Swicthing Swicthing Switching - a Switching - b Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching - a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
LRP-SM/23-1
ELP-SM/23-1
PP-SM/23-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
DBL OFF - 2201 DBL OFF - 2202 DBL OFF - 2203 DBL OFF - 2204 DBL OFF - 2205 SGL OFF - 2210 SGL OFF - 2211 SGL OFF - 2212 SGL OFF - 2213 SGL OFF - 2214 SGL OFF - 2231 SGL OFF - 2232 SGL OFF - 2233 SGL OFF - 2234 AA - 2223 to 2228 Study - 2026 Copy Center - 2027 Toilet - 2020 Elec - 2022 IDF - 2023 LV Panels - 2016
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 8 3.8 6.8
3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.7 7.2 7.2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 17 6 2 4 2 4 4 Ckt-9 @ ECB-SM/24-1 4 11 4 11 4 11 6
Meeting - 2220
7.7
2 23
DBL OFF - 2206
4.5
3.2
14 19 of 22
S.N Load Served Area DBL OFF - 2206 DBL OFF - 2207 DBL OFF - 2208 Store- 2209 SGL OFF - 2215 SGL OFF - 2216 Area dimensions L W 4.5 3.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5 3.5 3.2 3.2 3 3 3.2 3.2 3 SGL OFF - 2217 Stor - 2218 SGL OFF - 2229 SGL OFF - 2235 SGL OFF - 2236 SGL OFF - 2237 CHAIR - 2238 Corridor - 2088 Corridor - 2093 Corridor - 2170 32
L
Normal Circuit Number 14
Emergency Circuit Number 1 1
Control Type Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - c Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Swicthing Switching - d Switching Emergency - j Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching d Switching emergency Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Window Curtain Total: Switching - e Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Swicthing Switching - d
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
14 14 16 3 16
3.5 3.5 3.7 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.7
3.2 3 4 3.2 3.2 3.2 7 50 5.5

W
16 3 16 16 3 18 5 18 5 18 5 18 5 19 20 20 26
LRP-SM/24-1 ELP-SM/24-1 PP-SM/24-1
Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 39 1 65 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks / Comments
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SGL OFF - 2333 SGL OFF - 2334 SGL OFF - 2335 SGL OFF - 2336 Chair - 2337 DBL OFF - 2305 DBL OFF - 2306 DBL OFF - 2307 DBL OFF - 2308 Store- 2309 Chair - 2230
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 3.5
3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.8 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 6.5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 19 20 of 22
S.N Load Served Area Chair - 2230 Area dimensions L W 3.5 6.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.8 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8.2 3.2 3.2 6.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3 3.8 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 6.7 Normal Circuit Number 19 1 19 1 19 1 21 3 21 3 21 3 21 3 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 23 5 23 5 23 5 23 5 2 4 Meeting - 2320 7.7 6 4 29 Toilet - 2030 Elec - 2032 JANI - 2031 IDF - 2033 Prayer, 2350 Corridor - 2081 Corridor - 2083 4 25 6 Ckt-6 @ ECB-SM/24-1 6 8 6 6 8 16 20 14 21 of 22 Window Curtain Window Curtain 2 Emergency Circuit Number 1 Power Circuit Number Control Type Switching Emergency - j Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Switching - e Switching Emergency - j Switching - d Switching Emergency - h Switching - c Switching Emergency - g Switching - b Switching Emergency - f Switching - a Switching Emergency - e Switching - d Switching Emergency - d Switching - c Switching Emergency - c Switching - b Switching Emergency - b Swicthing Switching - a Switching Emergency - a Switching - d Switching Emergency - a Switching - c Switching Emergency - h Switching - b Switching Emergency - g Switching - a Switching Emergency - f Swicthing - a Switching emergency - a Switching a Switching b Switching Emergency - a Projector Circuit Projector Screen Switching - a Switching emergency - a Swicthing Switching Emergency Swicthing Swicthing Switching Emergency Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Conventional Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 6 1 Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch Conventional Switch 1 2 1 2 Remarks / Comments
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
SGL OFF - 2330 SGL OFF - 2331 Chair - 2332 SGL OFF - 2310 SGL OFF - 2311 SGL OFF - 2312 SGL OFF - 2313 SGL OFF - 2314 SGL OFF - 2315 SGL OFF - 2316 SGL OFF - 2317 Store - 2318 SGL OFF - 2329 DBL OFF - 2301 DBL OFF - 2302 DBL OFF - 2303 DBL OFF - 2304 AA - 2323 to 2328
S.N Load Served Area Corridor - 2083 Area dimensions L W Normal Circuit Number Emergency Circuit Number Power Circuit Number 16 Switch Number Number Presence Sensor, 4- of on/off of Detector channels Shutter fold, Window Curtain 1 2 Total: 38 1 61 8 Control Type Remarks / Comments
22 of 22
DELL OPTIPLEX 755
ADVANCED REMOTE MANAGEMENT: New capabilities that allow IT to have greater control
ROBUST MAINSTREAM DESKTOp DESIGNED TO MEET YOUR NEEDS, NOW AND IN THE FUTURE
our choice of flexible options from ASF 2.0 to Intel AMT 3.0, Y and even full Intel vPRO processor technology Standards-based management (DASH 1.0 and WS-MAN) help ensure simplicity and interoperability Dell Client Manager brings it all together in one management console
POWER EFFICIENCY: Productivity and power savings in a proven, reliable design

ells unique approach to Energy Smart hardware and D software including Intel Core 2 Duo processors, efficient management power settings, available 80+ power supplies and ENERGY STAR 4.0 configurations Dells online Energy Calculator indicates potential savings of up to 78% by choosing the most efficient configurations Dell is working alongside industry leaders and governments worldwide to help drive revolutionary change
SMART SECURITY: Strategic, comprehensive endpoint solutions for all types of businesses The new Dell OptiPlex 755 offers a compelling, versatile solution that can help you meet evolving business needs with the right technologies and services. Thanks to Dells innovative approach to scalable remote client management, the OptiPlex 755 offers you a choice between several systems-management options. These options allow you to select an approach thats appropriate for your current infrastructure, while easily scaling to meet future needs. Options include:

Intel vPro technology helps simplify asset inventory, isolation of virus-infected PCs, security patch deployment and more RAID 1 support helps keep data intact and accessible via real-time redundancy Built-in TPM 1.2 helps protect the network from unauthorized access, while enabling multi-factor authentication via optional Smart Card Reader and/or fingerprint reader
idely installed ASF (Alert Standard Format) standards-based technology, W which supports basic in- and out-of-band hardware inventory, alerting, and power control Intel Active Management Technology (Intel AMT), which adds encrypted communications to ASF requirements, and also provides remote diagnosis and troubleshooting capabilities Intel vPRO processor-based technology adds processor-specific security technologies to Intel AMTs functionality
DELL DEpLOYMENT SERVICES: Image management, customization and deployment made easy

In addition, Dell continues to expand our Deployment Services now featuring ImageDirect, a web-based tool that can enable you to build and apply custom images for current and future systems. And because we know data security is a vital concern, the OptiPlex 755 offers optional RAID 1 support for real-time data- mirroring protection. Plus, those who elect for a full vPRO platform can enjoy additional advanced security and remote remediation features.
pecific provisioning and pre-configured setting options for S iAMT and Intel vPRO technology customers ImageDirect allows you to create, manage and load your custom images to Dell client systems Microsoft Windows Vista Assessment and Migration options help streamline and optimize your deployment processes
DELL OPTIPLEX 755

SYSTEM
Processor Type - Intel Core 2 Quad - 1066MHz FSB, LGA 775, 8MB L2 cache, Intel VT, Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, Intel 64 and Execute Disable Bit (Q6xxx series) - Intel Core 2 Duo - 1333MHz FSB, LGA 775, 4MB L2 cache, Intel vPro Technology, Intel VT, Intel TXT, Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, Intel 64 and Execute Disable Bit (E6x50 series) - Intel Core 2 Duo - 800MHz FSB, LGA 775, 2MB L2 cache, Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, Intel 64 and Execute Disable Bit (E4000 series) - Intel Pentium- 800MHz FSB, LGA 775, 1MB L2 cache, Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology, Intel 64 and Execute Disable Bit (E2000 series) - Intel Celeron- 800MHz FSB, LGA 775, 512MB L2 cache, Intel 64 and Execute Disable Bit Intel Q35 Express Chipset (ICH9DO) Dell recommends Microsoft Windows XP Professional; Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition; Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic; Microsoft Windows Vista Business; Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 31001; DVI Adapter card; 256MB ATI Radeon HD 2400 PRO w/DVI and TV-out; 256MB ATI Radeon HD 2400 XT Dual monitor DVI/VGA via cables, TV-out Up to four DIMM slots (2 in USFF chassis); Non-ECC dual channel2 DDR2 SDRAM3, supporting 512MB to 8GB4 (except on USFF) -Supports 667 MHz up to 8GB4 -Supports 800 MHz up to 8GB4. USFF provides 2 DIMM slots (Max memory of 4GB4) Intel 82566DM Gigabit5 LAN 10/100/1000 9 USB 2.0 (2 front, 6 rear, 1 internal), USFF offers 7 USB 2.0 (2 front, 5 rear), 1 Ethernet (RJ45), 1 serial (9-pin) (16550 compatible), 1 parallel (25-hole, bi-directional), 1 VGA out (15-hole), 1 DVI-I out (USFF) 28-hole DVI connector, optional add-in PS2 card with second serial port (not available on USFF), 1 stereo line-in, 1 microphone-in, 1 speakers/line-out, 1 headphone (front), optional add-in external SATA card with SATA port (not available on USFF) 80GB, 160GB and 250GB6 7200RPM SATA II, 3.0GB/s and 80GB4 10K RPM SATA II 3.0GB/s
Chipset Operating Systems Video Memory
Networking Standard I/O Ports
Hard Drive
CHASSIS
Dimensions (H x W x D) Minitower: 16.10" x 7.36" x 17.52" (40.89cm x 18.69cm x 44.50cm) 2 internal 3.5" 1 external 3.5" 2 external 5.25" 2 full height PCI 1 full height PCIe x16 graphics 1 full height PCIe x1 Desktop: 15.65" x 4.59" x 14.25" (39.75cm x 11.66cm x 36.19cm) 1 internal 3.5" 1 external 3.5" 1 external 5.25" 2 low-profile PCI 1 low-profile PCle x16 graphics (Optional riser converts the PCle and PCI to either 1 PCle and 1 PCI or 2 PCI, full height) Small Form Factor: 12.45" x 3.65" x 13.4" (31.63cm x 9.26cm x 34cm) 1 internal 3.5" 1 external 3.5" (slimline) 1 external 5.25" (slimline) 1 low-profile PCI 1 low-profile PCle x16 graphics Ultra Small Form Factor: 10.3" x 3.5" x 9.9" (26.3cm x 8.9cm x 25.28cm) 1 internal hard drive 1 external removeable drive
Number of Bays
Expansion Slots
Power Supply
Minitower 305W; Desktop 280W; Small Form Factor 275W; Ultra Small Form Factor 220W
PERIPHERALS
Monitors CRT: Dell 17" E773 CRT, analog; Dell 17" E773 CRT, analog; speakers Flat Panel Analog: Dell 15" E157FP Flat Panel, analog; Dell 17" E177FP Flat Panel, analog; Dell 17" E178FP Flat Panel, analog; Dell 19" E197FP Flat Panel, analog; Dell 19" E198FP Flat Panel, analog Widescreen Flat Panel Analog: Dell 19" E198WFP Widescreen Flat Panel, analog; Dell 20" E207WFP Widescreen Flat Panel, analog; Dell 22" E228WFP Widescreen Flat Panel, analog UltraSharp Digital Flat Panel: Dell 17" UltraSharp 1707FPV Flat Panel, VA, adjustable stand, VGA/DVI; Dell 19" UltraSharp 1907FPV Flat Panel, VA, adjustable stand, VGA/DVI; Dell 17" UltraSharp Dell USB keyboard, no hot keys; Dell USB Enhanced Multimedia keyboard; Smart Card Reader USB keyboard; Bluetooth keyboard and mouse Dell USB two-button and Dell USB optical two-button scroll, Dell USB Premium five-button Internal Dell Business audio speaker, Dell A225, Dell A525, AS501 and AS501PA sound bar available with select FP monitors
Keyboard Mouse Speakers
STORAGE DEVICES
Removeable Media Storage Devices Floppy drive, CD-ROM, CD-RW/DVD combo, DVD-ROM7 and DVD+/-RW8
SECURITY
Security Wave EMBASSY Trust Suite, Chassis loop lock support (with cable locks available), Chassis intrusion switch, Setup/BIOS Password, I/O Interface Security, Smart Card and Bio-metric readers, Intel vPro Circuit Breaker technology, Intel Trusted Execution Technology and VT-d
SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
Hardware Management Options Dell Client Manager Standard No Management (Management Disabled) ASF 2.0 (Legacy Systems Management), iAMT 3.0, Intel vPRO A no-charge download of a single hardware management console allows you to deploy, manage and troubleshoot Dell client systems across your entire organization. Optional upgrades to Dell Client Manager Plus or the Management Suite for Dell Clients available. Altiris Manageability Toolkit required to support advanced Intel vPro Technology features, sold separately
ENVIRONMENTAL, ERGONOMICS AND REGULATORY, SERVICE AND SUPPORT

Standards Base Service Optional Service Blue Angel, CECP, E-star 4.0, TCO 05, WEEE, Japan Energy Law, CES, Japan Green PC, FEMP, South Korea Eco-label, EU RoHS9, China RoHS, EPEAT Three-Year Limited Warranty10 and Next Business Day On-Site Service11 (U.S. Only) Three-Year Same Day Four-Hour On-Site Response Service11, 5 days x 10 hours a day Three-Year Same Day Four-Hour On-Site Response Service11, 7 days x 24 hours a day
1. Up to 256MB of system memory may be allocated to support integrated graphics, depending on system memory size and other factors. 2. Dual-channel memory requires two each of the same capacity memory DIMMs. 3. Your graphics solution may use a portion of your system memory to support graphics depending on your operating system, system memory size and other factors. 4. The total amount of usable memory available will be less than 4GB, depending on the actual system configuration. To utilize more than 4GB of memory requires a 64-bit OS. 5. This term does not connote an actual operating speed of 1 GB/sec. For high speed transmission, connection to a Gigabit Ethernet server and network infrastructure is required. 6. For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes; actual capacity varies with preloaded material and operating system and will be less. 7. DVD-ROM drives may have write-capable hardware that has been disabled via firmware modifications. 8. Discs burned with this drive may not be compatible with some existing drives and players; using DVD+R media provides maximum compatibility. 9. Meets the requirements of the EU Directive on the restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances dated January 27, 2003. 10. For a copy of our guarantees or limited warranties, please write Dell USA L.P., Attn: Warranties, One Dell Way, Round Rock, TX 78682. For more information, visit www.dell.com/warranty. 11. Service may be provided by third-party. Technician will be dispatched if necessary following phone-based troubleshooting. Subject to parts availability, geographical restrictions and terms of service contract. Service timing dependent upon time of day call placed to Dell. U.S. only. Dell, the Dell logo, OptiPlex are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel, Core, Pentium, Celeron and SpeedStep are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Altiris and Manageability Tool Kit are registered trademarks or trademarks of Altiris, Inc. ATI Radeon is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell disclaims proprietary interest in the names and marks of others. Copyright 2007 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction or distribution in any manner whatsoever without the express written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. 07DCPG120_0707. A2G
Project : PRINCESS NORA BINT ABDULRAHMAN UNIVERSITY - PACKAGE 1 Building : 2.1.0 School of Medicine Subject : Estimation
EIB Decives Line Coupler LK/S 4.1 Application Unit Time Battery Module, AM/S USB Interface USB 3.1 Lighting Circuits 2 fold Switching Devices (SA/S2.16.1) EIB Decives 12 fold Switching Devices (SA/S12.16.1) 8 fold Switching Devices (SA/S8.16.1) 4 fold Switching Devices (SA/S4.16.1) Shutter Circuits EIB Decives Multi-function Switch Sensors 4-fold Presence Detector Enclosure
Bus Connection Terminal
Application Unit Logic
EIB Brightness Sensor
Mini-Center 48 Module
Mini-Center 80 Module
Touch Screen
NT/S 12.1600
S.N.
EIB Panel Name
Power Supply SUS/30.6 40.1
Total Total with Lighting 20% Spare Circuits Including (Emergency) (Emergency)
Total Lighting Circuits (Normal)
Total with 20% Spare Including Normal
Total Shutter Circuits
8 fold Total Shutter with 20% Devices Spare JA/S 8.230.1
Bus Coupler
Total Number of Modules
IP Router
Location GF 1st F 2nd F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
B.M EIB-LRP-SM/B4-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G1-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G2-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G3-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G4-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G11-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G12-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G13-1 EIB-LRP-SM/G14-1 EIB-LRP-SM/21-1 EIB-LRP-SM/22-1 EIB-LRP-SM/23-1 EIB-LRP-SM/24-1 Total :
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 30
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 30
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 29 1 2 1 26 1 200 1 2 1 26 1 200
17 22 11 29 24 38 19 51 30 29 28 30 29 357
20 26 13 35 29 46 23 61 36 35 34 36 35 428
23 47 43 52 49 43 37 61 34 32 30 35 32 518
28 56 52 62 59 52 44 73 41 38 36 42 38 622
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 7
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 6
3 6 5 8 7 8 5 11 6 6 6 6 6 83
0 26 38 18 26 18 28 22 8 10 8 10 8 220
0 31 46 22 31 22 34 26 10 12 10 12 10 264
0 4 6 3 4 3 5 4 2 2 2 2 2 39
29 50 42 49 46 57 40 68 40 40 37 40 39 577
27 38 31 42 38 52 32 63 39 39 36 39 38 514
2 12 11 7 8 5 8 5 1 1 1 1 1 63 1 10 1 10
160 160 160 168 170 170 154 232 142 136 134 142 136 2064
2 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 41
2 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 41
General Information 1- All circuit details, EIB network layout drawing and the single line diagram submitted along with this submittal are based on approved shop drawings of lighting and power. 2- Along with the submittal we attached one LRP panel shop drawings for approval and LRP sample will be submitted to the site consultant for approval. 3- We considered your approval on the materials submitted to you in the following references: - MAT-P1-EL-1304-01 - MAT-P1-EL-1306-02 as approval for all buildings and we attached all approved materials data sheet in separate column.
ABB i-bus EIB
Brightness sensor, 3-channel, MDRC HS/S 3.1, GH Q605 0063 R0001

The brightness sensor is a DIN rail mounted device for insertion in the distribution board. The connection to the EIB is established via a bus connecting terminal. The supplied light sensor for recording the ambient brightness level is mounted on the outside of the building and connected via two screw terminals. The brightness sensor can send switching telegrams to EIB actuators when the brightness exceeds or falls below a specified threshold. Three different threshold values between 1 .... 20,000 lux can be set via the ETS2 program.
Technical Data
S 0060 B00.tif
Power supply Inputs
EIB Brightness ranges
Operating and display elements Connections
Cable length Red LED and push button Light sensor EIB Control unit Light sensor Operation of control unit Operation of light sensor Storage Transport Modular installation device, proM Plastic housing, grey Control unit Light sensor
24 V DC, via the bus line 1 100 lux 100 20,000 lux can be selected via software max. 100 m for assigning the physical address 2 screw terminals Wire range 0.5 2 mm2 Pins for bus connecting terminal IP 20, EN 60 529 IP 54, EN 60 529 - 5 C 45 C -40 C 70 C -25 C 55 C -25 C 70 C
Design Housing, colour Mounting
Dimensions Mounting depth/width Weight Certification CE norm Special features
Control unit Light sensor Control unit Control unit Light sensor EIB-certified in accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline Inputs
on 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 50022 with mounting bracket on vertical surface 86 x 36 x 64 mm (H x W x D) 74 / 118 x 27 x 36 / 62 mm (H x W x D) 68 mm / 2 modules at 18 mm 0.180 kg 0.04 kg
1, for light sensor
HS/S 3.1
Page 1 of 8 HSS_31_TD_EN_V1-1 2CDC 507 026 D0201
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

Number of communication objects 4 5 Max. number of group addresses 5 5 Max. number of associations 5 5
Application programs Switch Steps Cyclic Switch Steps Value Cyclic
Circuit diagram
1 Programming LED and push button 2 Bus connection
3 Connection for light sensor
Note
The light sensor is fixed with a mounting bracket as supplied to a vertical surface. The intake for the signal cable must point downwards. When selecting the installation site, you should note the following: The maximum cable length is 100 m. A conventional, two-core cable can be used.
Make sure that the light sensor is not in shadow. If the brightness sensor should be used for switching external lighting, the light sensor should face eastwards. If it is to be used for room lighting, it should preferably face northwards.
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

Switch The brightness sensor has three 1 bit communication objects which can send On or Off switching telegrams when the brightness value exceeds or falls below the respective threshold value. It is possible to define separately for an overrange or undershoot of the respective threshold, whether the communication object should send cyclically. A common cyclic time is set for all the channels. Threshold value The three threshold values can be set independently in the parameters as resistance values of the light sensors. Depending on the tolerance of the light sensor, it may be necessary to correct the resistance value that was originally selected. The following table helps in this regard: Illuminance Resistance / Ohm / lux approx. 1 2.4 M approx. 1.5 2.0 M approx. 2 1.5 M approx. 3 1.0 M approx. 5 700.0 k approx. 7 460.0 k approx. 10 340.0 k approx. 20 200.0 k approx. 30 140.0 k approx. 50 100.0 k approx. 200 30.0 k approx. 300 19.6 k approx. 500 12.8 k approx. 700 10.4 k approx. 1000 8.4 k approx. 1500 6.0 k approx. 2000 5.2 k approx. 2500 4.0 k approx. 5000 2.8 k approx. 7000 2.4 k approx. 10000 2.0 k If the current measured value fluctuates by the set threshold value, it can result in frequent switching operations. It is possible to set a common hysteresis for all the channels to prevent this from happening. The percentage value for this hysteresis refers to the resistance value of the light sensor, whereby the resolution of the brightness sensor must be taken into consideration. The resolution of the light sensor is 400 Ohm in a range between 1.2 kOhm and 50 kOhm (corresponds to 20000 lux to 100 lux). It is set at 20 kOhm in a range between 50 kOhm and 2.5 MOhm (corresponds to 100 lux to 1 lux). The following example serves to clarify the setting of the hysteresis: At a threshold value of 10 kOhm (corresponds to approx. 700 lux), the brightness sensor detects at approx. 10.4 kOhm that it has become darker. If the hysteresis is set at 12.5%, it should detect at approx. 8.75 kOhm that it is lighter. With a resolution of 400 Ohm, the actual threshold lies at 8.4 kOhm. This corresponds to approx. 1000 lux. Channel selection The three threshold value objects can be disabled individually or together via object no. 3. The three least significant bits of the 1 byte communication object are evaluated individually. If a channel is disabled, the communication object is no longer permitted to send any telegrams. If the channel is enabled, the communication object sends a telegram with its current value.
Switch Steps Cyclic
1 lx
Selection in ETS2 ABB Phys. Sensors Brightness
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

The following table lists the values that must be sent to object no. 3 in order to disable and/or enable specific objects. Dec. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Binary 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 Ch.3 enab. enab. enab. enab. disab. disab. disab. disab. Ch.2 enab. enab. disab. disab. enab. enab. block. disab. Ch.1 enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. If channels 3 and 1 should be enabled and channel 2 should be disabled, telegram 0000 0010 must be sent to object no. 3. This corresponds to the decimal value 2. This value can be sent e.g. using ETS or by a logic module. To prevent the light from being continually switched in the event of temporary fluctuations, it is possible to define a common delay time for all the channels. The brightness must exceed or fall below the set threshold for this delay time before the brightness sensor may send a telegram. This setting applies for all the channels.
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
7
Communication objects No. 0 1 2 3 Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte Object name Threshold channel 1 Threshold channel 2 Threshold channel 3 Input telegr. Function Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Disable channels 1-3
Parameters The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
General: Interval for cyclical sending Hysteresis of threshold values 13 Delay time when brightness exceeds/falls below threshold Separate for channel 1 channel 3: Threshold value
approx. 3 min / approx. 5 min / approx. 10 min / / approx. 60 min approx. 25 % / approx. 12.5 % / approx. 6 % approx. 10 sec. / approx. 20 sec. / / approx. 60 sec. / / approx. 3 min
When brightness falls below threshold value (-> darker), channel sends
When brightness exceeds threshold value (-> brighter), channel sends
2.0 kOhm, approx. 10000 lux 2.4 kOhm, approx. 7000 lux 200 kOhm, approx. 20 lux 2.4 MOhm, approx. 1 lux no telegram OFF telegram once ON telegram once OFF telegrams cyclically ON telegrams cyclically no telegram OFF telegram once ON telegram once OFF telegrams cyclically ON telegrams cyclically no telegram current value immediately
Behaviour of channels when disabled: When disabled, channels 1...3 send When enabled, channels 1...3 send Further information about disabling/ enabling channels 13 can be found in the ETS application description
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

Scene Using this application program, the brightness sensor can implement lightscene control with four brightness-dependent scenes. Each scene consists of three 1 bit communication objects and a 1 byte communication object. The four lightscenes are differentiated from each other by the three threshold values. Threshold value The brightness sensor has a common parameter Measuring range to define the threshold values. The two measuring ranges 100 - 20000 lux (50 kOhm 1 kOhm) and 1 - 100 lux (2.5 MOhm 50 kOhm) can be selected. There is a parameter for each of the three threshold values of light, medium and dark. The three values must be used in ascending order. Increased resistance values mean reduced illuminance levels due to the characteristic curve of the sensor. Depending on the tolerance of the light sensor, it may be necessary to correct the resistance value that was originally selected. The following table helps in this regard: Illuminance Resistance / Ohm / lux approx. 1 2.4 M approx. 1.5 2.0 M approx. 2 1.5 M approx. 3 1.0 M approx. 5 700.0 k approx. 7 460.0 k approx. 10 340.0 k approx. 20 200.0 k approx. 30 140.0 k approx. 50 100.0 k approx. 200 30.0 k approx. 300 19.6 k approx. 500 12.8 k approx. 700 10.4 k approx. 1000 8.4 k approx. 1500 6.0 k approx. 2000 5.2 k approx. 2500 4.0 k approx. 5000 2.8 k approx. 7000 2.4 k approx. 10000 2.0 k approx. 20000 1.0 k The resolution of the light sensor is 400 Ohm in a range between 1.2 kOhm and 50 kOhm (corresponds to 20000 lux to 100 lux). It is set at 20 kOhm in a range between 50 kOhm and 2.5 MOhm (corresponds to 100 lux to 1 lux). The following example serves to clarify the setting of the hysteresis: At a threshold value of 10 kOhm (corresponds to approx. 700 lux), the brightness sensor detects at approx. 10.4 kOhm that it has become darker. If the hysteresis is set at 12.5%, it should detect at approx. 8.75 kOhm that it is lighter. With a resolution of 400 Ohm, the actual threshold lies at 8.4 kOhm. This corresponds to approx. 1000 lux. To prevent the light from being continually switched in the event of temporary fluctuations, it is possible to define a common delay time for all the channels. The value must exceed or fall below the set threshold for this delay time before the brightness sensor may send a telegram. This setting applies for all the channels. Cyclic A common setting is selected for all the outputs to determine whether they should send cyclically or only when changing scenes. The cyclic time can be set between 2.5 minutes and 60 minutes. If the current measured value fluctuates by the set threshold value, it can result in frequent switching operations. It is possible to set a common hysteresis for all the channels to prevent this from happening. The percentage value for this hysteresis refers to the resistance value of the light sensor, whereby the resolution of the brightness sensor must be taken into consideration.
Switch Steps Value Cyclic
1 lx
Selection in ETS2 ABB Phys. Sensors Brightness
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

Switch For the four scenes Brighter than threshold 1, Between threshold 1 and 2, Between threshold 2 and 3 and Darker than threshold 3, it is possible to set separately for the 1 bit communication objects whether they should send telegrams. The value of the communication object is set with the following parameter and determines when the output should send a telegram. Value In the same way as for the 1 bit communication objects, it is also possible to select for the 1 byte communication object of output 1 when it should send a telegram and which value it should use. Channel selection The four communication objects for the outputs can be disabled individually or together via object no. 4. The four least significant bits of the 1 byte communication object are evaluated individually. If an output is disabled, the communication object is no longer permitted to send any telegrams. If the channel is enabled, the communication object sends a telegram with its current value. The table below lists the values that must be sent to object no. 4 in order to disable and/or enable specific channels. If e.g. channels 3 and 1 should be enabled and channels 2 and 4 should be disabled, telegram 0000 0101 must be sent to object no. 4. This corresponds to the decimal value 5. This value can be sent e.g. using ETS or by a logic module.
Dec. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
Ch.4 enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. enab. disab. enab.. disab.
Ch.3 enab. enab. enab. enab. enab. enab. enab. enab. disab. disab. disab. disab. disab. disab. disab. disab.
Ch.2 enab. enab. enab. enab. disab. disab. disab. disab. enab. enab. enab. enab. disab. disab. disab. disab.
Ch.1 enab. enab. disab. disab. enab. enab. disab. disab. enab. enab. disab. disab. enab. enab.. disab. disab.
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

No. 0 1 2 3 4 Type 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte Object name Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Input telegr. Function Telegr. value Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Positive operation
Communication objects
General: Cyclical sending Only if yes is selected: Interval for cyclical sending Threshold values: Measuring range
yes no approx. 3 min / approx. 5 min / approx. 10 min / / approx. 60 min 100 - 20000 lux (approx. 50 kOhm1 kOhm) 1 - 100 lux (approx. 2.5 MOhm50 kOhm)
Only for measuring range 100-20000 lux: Threshold 1 (light) 1 kOhm (approx. 20000 lux) 1.2 kOhm 2 kOhm (approx. 10000 lux) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux) not activated Threshold 2 (medium) 1 kOhm (approx. 20000 lux) 1.2 kOhm 8.4 kOhm (approx. 1000 lux) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux) not activated Threshold 3 (dark) 1 kOhm (approx. 20000 lux) 1.2 kOhm 28 kOhm (approx. 200 lux) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux) not activated Only for measuring range 1-100 lux: Threshold 1 (light) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux) 60 kOhm 2.50 MOhm not activated Threshold 2 (medium) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux) 60 kOhm 90 kOhm (approx. 50lux) 2.50 MOhm not activated Threshold 3 (dark) 50 kOhm (approx. 100 lux) 60 kOhm 130 kOhm (approx. 30 lux) 2.50 MOhm not activated Hysteresis of threshold values 13 approx. 25 % / approx. 12.5 % / approx. 6 %
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus EIB

Delay time when brightness exceeds/falls below threshold Separate for the 4 brightness ranges: Channel 1 (switching) sends Only if telegram is sent: Channel 2 (switching) sends Only if telegram is sent: Channel 3 (switching) sends Only if telegram is sent: Channel 4 (value) sends approx. 20 sec. / approx. 30 sec. / / approx. 4 min no telegram following telegram ON OFF no telegram following telegram ON OFF no telegram following telegram ON OFF no telegram following telegram
Only if telegram is sent: Value (0255) 0 Behaviour of channels 13 when disabled: Channel (switch) sends no telegram following telegram once Only if telegram is sent: ON OFF Behaviour of channel 4 when disabled: Channel (value) sends no telegram following telegram once Only if telegram is sent: Value (0255) 0 Further information about disabling/ enabling channels 1...3 can be found in the ETS application description
HS/S 3.1
HS/S 3.1
ABB i-bus KNX
IP Router, MDRC IPR/S 2.1, 2CDG 110 061 R0011
2
2CDC 071 045 F0007
The IP Router 2.1 is a modular installation device (MDRC) and forms the interface between KNX installations and IP networks. It can be used as a fast line and area coupler and can utilise the local network (LAN) for fast exchange of telegrams between the lines/areas. KNX devices can be programmed via the LAN using ETS 3.0. The device uses the KNXnet/IP protocol from the KNX Association (Routing and Tunnelling).
The IP address can be fixed or can be received from a DHCP server. The power supply range is from 10 to 30 V DC.
Technical data Supply Supply voltage Us Power consumption Current consumption Leakage loss Rated voltage Un Rated current In Current consumption KNX Connections KNX Plug-in terminal for operating voltage LAN Operating and display elements LED red and button LED green LED yellow Enclosure Safety class Isolation category KNX safety extra low voltage Temperature range IP 20 II Overvoltage category Pollution degree SELV 24 V DC Operation Storage Transport Ambient conditions Design Maximum air humidity Modular installation device (MDRC) Dimensions Mounting width Mounting depth Installation On 35 mm mounting rail 0 C+45 C -25 C+55 C -25 C+70 C 93 %, no condensation allowed Modular installation device, ProM 90 x 36 x 64 mm (H x W x D) 2 modules at 18 mm 68 mm To DIN EN 60 715 1030 V DC via plug-in terminal Ripple: < 5 % Maximum 1.9 W at 10 V Maximum 190 mA at 10 V Maximum 1.9 W at 10 V 12 V DC 145 mA at 12 V From KNX < 10 mA Bus connection terminal Plug-in terminal RJ45 socket for 10/100BaseT, IEEE 802.3 networks, AutoSensing For assignment of the physical address Operating mode display Network connection indicator KNX telegram traffic indicator To DIN EN 60529 To DIN EN 61140 III to DIN EN 60664-1 2 to DIN EN 60664-1
IPR/S 2.1
Page 1 of 4 IPRS_21_TD_EN_V2-0 2CDC 502 047 D0202
IPR/S 2.1
ABB i-bus KNX
Mounting position Weight Housing, colour Approvals CE mark
as required 0.100 kg Plastic housing, grey KNX to EN 50 090-1, -2 In accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline
Application program Routing
Maximum number of communication objects 0
Maximum number of group addresses 0
Maximum number of associations 0
Note For a detailed description of the application program see IP Router IPR/S 2.1 product manual. It is available free-of-charge at www.ABB.de/KNX. The programming requires EIB Software Tool ETS3 V3.0e or higher. If ETS3 is used a *.VD3 or higher type file must be imported. The application program is available in the ETS3 at ABB/System devices/Routing. The device does not support the closing function of a project or the KNX device in the ETS. If you inhibit access to all devices of the project with a BCU code (ETS3), it has no effect on this device. Data can still be read and programmed.
IPR/S 2.1
IPR/S 2.1
ABB i-bus KNX
Circuit diagram
1 LED ON 2 LED LAN/LINK 3 LED telegram 4 Supply voltage connection 5 KNX connection
6 Programming LED 7 Programming button 8 Label carrier 9 LAN connection
Dimension drawing
IPR/S 2.1
IPR/S 2.1
2CDC 071 112 F0008
2CDC 072 186 F0007
ABB i-bus KNX
Notes
IPR/S 2.1
IPR/S 2.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Shutter Actuator, 8-fold, 230 V AC, MDRC JA/S 8.230.1, GH Q631 0063 R0111
2CDC 071 238 F0003
For controlling a maximum of eight independent 230 V AC shutter or sunblind drives via ABB i-bus including the functions Up/Down, Step/Stop, Move to position, Sun protection automatic control and Heating/cooling automatic control. The output contacts for the directions UP and DOWN are mechanically interlocked so that voltage cannot be applied at both contacts at the same time. The pause on change in direction can be set via the parameters.
The Shutter Actuator is for DIN rail mounting. It is connected to the ABB i-bus EIB via a Bus connection terminal.
7
Technical data Power supply Operating voltage Current input Power consumption via EIB Number of outputs 21...30 V DC, via the EIB typ. 10 mA < 250 mW 8 independent outputs, each with 1 changeover contact (UP/DOWN mechanically interlocked) 230 V AC 6 A (AC1/AC3) at 230 V AC or 6 A (AC1/AC3) at 400 V AC 100 mA at 5 V or 10 mA at 10 V or 1 mA at 24 V for entering the physical address 4 screw terminals for phase connection (e.g. L1 and L2) 2 screw terminals per output for UP and DOWN Wire range: nely-stranded: 0.2 2.5 mm2 single-core: 0.2 4.0 mm2 Bus connection terminal (black/red) 5 C ... + 45 C 25 C ... + 55 C 25 C ... + 70 C
Outputs
Nominal voltage Max. switching current Min. switching current
Operating and display elements Connections
Red LED and push button Load circuits
Design Housing, colour Mounting Dimensions Mounting depth/width Weight Mounting position Certication CE norm
EIB IP 20, EN 60 529 Operation Storage Transport Modular installation device, proM Plastic housing, grey on 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 50 022 90 x 144 x 64 mm (H x W x D) 68 mm/8 modules at 18 mm 0.5 kg as required EIB- and KNX-certied in accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline
JA/S 8.230.1
Page 1 of 22 JAS_82301_TD_EN_V2-0 2CDC 506 026 D0201
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Application programs Max. number of communication objects 237 Max. number of group addresses 254 Max. number of associations 254
Shutter, 8f/1
Wiring diagram
Shutter and Blinds operating modes
Ventilation aps operating mode
L N PE
M M
1
M M
5 6
M M
10 11
M M
15 16
L1 L2 L3 N PE
12
13
14
17
18
M M
19 20
M M
4 5 6
M M
9 10 11
M M
14 15 16
3
1
12
13
17
18
19
20
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
7
6A 230 V AC
ABB i-bus EIB
6A
230 V AC
2 1 4
ABB i-bus EIB
2 1 4
1 Programming LED, push button 2 Marker Tag
3 Connection terminals 4 Bus terminal
Dimension drawing
58 43.5 6.5
1
144
10
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
JA /S 8.230.1
90
45
ABB i-bus EIB
6A
230 V AC
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Note
The programming is carried out with ETS from version ETS2 V1.2a onwards. ETS3 note: For programming the device with the help of the ETS3, the relevant VD3 le must be applied. To guarantee all the programmable functions, in particular the UP/DOWN directions of travel, it is important to ensure that the drive has been connected properly. The technical data supplied by the drive manu-facturer must be taken into account! If the outputs are switched several times in rapid succession, the switching of the output contacts is delayed. The following process should be carried out during the initial commissioning of the shutter actuator: 1. Install and wire up the shutter actuator. 2. First connect the EIB voltage. The output contacts automatically adopt the neutral position. 3. Only then connect the 230 V AC operating voltage for the shutter outputs.
If the preselected parameter settings have been modied during programming, the output contacts adoptthe specied position on bus voltage recovery once the EIB voltage has been connected. The function ventilation aps/switch mode may be inverted by connecting the load to the Down terminal instead of the Up terminal (e.g. terminal 2 instead of terminal 3). Depending on the position of the output contact, also the non-connected terminals are under voltage! The Shutter Actuator is supplied with a downloaded application program. It is therefore only necessary to download the group addresses and parameters during commissioning. The complete application program can also be downloaded if required.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Shutter, 8f/1
2 8
Communication objects in the operating modes Shutter and Blinds

Direct communication objects Move shutter Up-Down Move blinds Up-Down If a telegram with the value 0 is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind is raised. If a telegram with the value 1 is received, the shutter/blind is lowered. The output contact reverts to the neutral position once the total travel time has elapsed. Telegram value: 0: UP 1: DOWN Louvre adj. /Stop Up-Down Stop Up-Down If the shutter/blind is in motion, the movement is stopped on receipt of a telegram at this communication object, regardless of whether a 0 or a 1 is received. Blinds operating mode: If the shutter is idle, it is raised (0) or lowered (1) for the duration of the louvre adjustment and then stopped on receipt of a telegram at this object. Shutter operating mode: If the blind is idle, no action is carried out on receipt of a telegram at this communication object. Telegram value: 0: Stop/louvre adj. UP 1: Stop/louvre adj. DOWN Move to position 0...255 If a telegram is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind moves to the corresponding position for the received value. Telegram value: 0: Top ...: Intermediate position 255: Bottom After reaching the target position, the louvres are positioned as before. Only if during the shutter/blind movement a telegram was received on the com-munication object Move louvres 0255, the louvres will be positioned accordingly.
Selection in ETS2 ABB Shutter Switch
Move louvres 0...255 If a telegram is received at this communication object, the louvres are positioned according to the received value. If the shutter/blind is already in motion, it is rst moved to the target position and then the positioning of the louvres is carried out. Telegram value: 0: Louvres opened to maximum ...: Intermediate position 255: Louvres closed to maximum Move to position 1/2 Move to position 3/4 If a telegram is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind is moved to the stored preset position. In the Blinds operating mode, the louvre adjustment is carried out according to the preset position once the position has been reached. If a telegram with the value 0 is received, the shutter/blind moves to position 1 (or position 3). If a telegram with the value 1 is received, the shutter/blind is moved to position 2 (or position 4). Telegram value: 0: Move to position 1 or Move to position 3 1: Move to position 2 or Move to position 4 Set position 1/2 Set position 3/4 If a telegram is received at this communication object, the current position of the shutter/blind is adopted as the new preset value. If a telegram with the value 0 is received, the current position is stored as the new preset value for position 1 (or position 3). If a telegram with the value 1 is received, the current position is stored as the new preset value for position 2 (or position 4). If position 1 or 2 is now recalled (position 3 or 4), the shutter/blind moves to the new preset values. The modied preset values are retained on bus voltage failure. After programming the shutter actuator, the preset values are reset to the values that were parameterised during the project design stage or the values adapted in operation are stored, depending on parameterization.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Telegram value: 0: Set position 1 or Set position 3 1: Set position 2 or Set position 4 Shutter Up-Down limited Blinds Up-Down limited If a telegram with the value 0 is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind is raised. If a telegram with the value 1 is received, the shutter/blind is lowered. The shutter/blind is stopped if the Upper limit or the Lower limit of the travelling range is reached. If telegrams are received on the communication object Louvre adj./Stop Up-Down, the shutter/blind can be moved in steps external to the set limits. If the shutter/blind is positioned in a higher position than the upper limit, no reaction will be carried out after a telegram with the value 0 and it is moved down after a telegram with the value 1. If the shutter/blind is positioned in a lower position than the downer limit, no reaction will be carried out after a telegram with the value 1 and it is moved up after a telegram with the value 0. If the shutter actuator has not carried out a reference movement after programming, bus reset or bus voltage recovery, the shutter/blind is moved completely up or down when receiving a telegram on this communication object. It is not stopped at the upper or lower limit in this case. Telegram value: 0: UP 1: DOWN Reference movement If a telegram is received at this communication object, all the shutters/blinds which have the following settings are fully raised or fully lowe-red: the option deactivated has not been set for Position after reference movement the option Ventilation aps/switch mode has not been set as the Operating mode no safety function has been activated and manual operation has not been activated.
The saved position is updated and the shutter/blind is moved into the set Position after reference movement. If the option back to saved position has been selected and automatic control was activated for the shutter/ blind prior to the reference movement, automatic control is reactivated once the saved position has been reached. Telegram value: 0: Reference movement right to the top 1: Reference movement right to the bottom Scene Each output can be integrated into up to ten scenes with this communication object. A telegram is received which contains the number of the scene that is addressed together with the information about whether the shutter/ blind is moved to the last saved position or whether the current position should be stored as the new preset value. The stored scene values are retained in the event of a bus voltage failure and if only the parameters are downloaded during programming. If the complete application is downloaded again during programming, the scene value is reset to the position right at the top. Telegram code: MXNNNNNN NNNNNN: 0...63: Scene number X: free (contains no information) M: 0: Recall scene 1: Store scene Automatic communication objects Activation of automatic control If a telegram with the value 1 is received at this communication object, automatic control is activated for the corresponding output. The output is controlled via the automatic communication objects: Sun, Presence, Heating and Cooling as well as Move to position for sun 0...255 and Adjust louvres for sun 0...255. If a telegram with the value 0 is received, the shutter/blind remains in the current position and no longer reacts to incoming telegrams at the automatic communication objects. If the shutter is in the process of carrying out an automatic movement command, the action is carried out.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Telegram value: 0: Automatic control deactivated 1: Automatic control activated Sun Incoming telegrams at this communication object are only taken into account if the communication object Activation of automatic control has the value 1. If a telegram with the value 1 is received at the communication object Sun, the shutter/blind moves to the set Position for sun = 1. If a telegram with the value 0 is received, the shutter/blind moves to the set Position for sun = 0. The reaction to an incoming telegram can be carried out with a time delay via the parameters Delay for sun = 1 and Delay for sun = 0 so that the shutter/blind is not continually raised and lowered when there are frequent changes in the weather. If a telegram with the opposite value is received within the delay period, the shutter/blind does not move to the Position for sun = 1 and remains in the Position for sun = 0 or vice versa. If the option receive position via 8 bit value has been set for the parameter Position for sun = 1, the output moves once the delay period has elapsed to the position that was last received at the communication objects Move to position for sun 0...255 (Shutter and Blinds operating modes) and Adjust louvres for sun 0...255 (Blinds operating mode only). Telegram value: 0: No sun 1: Sun Move to position for sun 0...255 Incoming telegrams at this communication object are only executed if automatic control has been activated (Activation of automatic control= 1) and the sun is shining (Sun = 1). The shutter/blind is then positioned according to the received value. After reaching the target position, the louvres are positioned as before. Only if during the shutter/blind movement a telegram was received on the communication object Adjust louvres for sun 0255, the louvres will be positioned accordingly.
Telegram value: 0: Top ...: Intermediate position 255: Bottom Adjust louvres for sun 0...255 Incoming telegrams at this communication object are only executed if automatic control has been activated (Activation of automatic control= 1) and the sun is shining (Sun = 1). The louvres are then positioned according to the received value. The movement command Move to position for sun 0...255 is always executed rst. Once the target position is reached, the positioning of the louvres is carried out. Telegram value: 0: Louvres opened to maximum ...: Intermediate position 255: Louvres closed to maximum Presence Incoming telegrams at this communication object are only taken into account if the communication object Activation of automatic control has the value 1. Using the communication object Presence, it is possible to toggle between automatic sun protection and automatic heating/cooling. If a telegram with the value 1 is received at the object Presence, the shutter/blind is only controlled via the communication object Sun (automatic sun protection). If a telegram with the value 0 is received, the shutter/blind is controlled via the communication objects Sun, Heating and Cooling (automatic heating/cooling). The reaction to an incoming telegram can be carried out with a time delay via the parameters Delay for presence = 1 and Delay for presence = 0. If a telegram with the opposite value is received within the delay period, the period is restarted. If a telegram with the same value is received, the delay period is not restarted. The shutter/ blind moves to the target position once the delay has elapsed. Telegram value: 0: No-one is present ( automatic heating/cooling) 1: Someone is present ( automatic sun protection)
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Heating Cooling Incoming telegrams at these communication objects are only taken into account if the communication object Activation of automatic control has the value 1 and the communication object Presence has the value 0. If a telegram with the value 1 is received at the communication object Heating, the output moves to the set Position for heating = 1 and sun = 1 or Position for heating = 1 and sun = 0. If a telegram with the value 1 is received at the communication object Cooling, the output moves to the set Position for cooling = 1 and sun = 1 or Position for cooling = 1 and sun = 0. If a 0 or a 1 is received at both communication objects, the automatic heating/cooling mode is deactivated and the output is controlled via the automatic sun protection. Telegram value: 0: No heating/no cooling 1: Heating/cooling Enable/disable automatic control If a telegram with the value 1 is received at this communication object, automatic control is automatically deactivated and the output can only be controlled via the direct commu-nication objects. Automatic control can no longer be activated via the communication object Activation of automatic control. If a telegram with the value 0 is received at this communication object, automatic control can be reactivated for the corresponding output. Telegram value: 0: Automatic control enabled 1: Automatic control disabled Enable/block direct operation If a telegram with the value 1 is received at this communication object, the output switches automatically from direct operation to automatic control. Automatic control can no longer be deactivated via the communication object Activation of automatic control or the direct communication objects.
Incoming telegrams at the direct communication objects are not executed. If a telegram with the value 0 is received at this communication object, automatic control can be deactivated again for the corresponding output. Telegram value: 0: Direct operation enabled 1: Direct operation blocked Safety communication objects Wind alarm no. X Rain alarm Frost alarm These communication objects expect cyclical telegrams. If a telegram with the value 0 is received within the monitoring period, the associated outputs can be controlled via the direct and automatic communication objects. If no telegrams or a telegram with the value 1 are received during the monitoring period, the shutters/blinds are moved to the set Position for wind alarm (for rain alarm or frost alarm). Operation via the direct and automatic communication objects is disabled. If a telegram with the value 0 is received again for the rst time after a weather alarm or once the monitoring period has been exceeded, the shutters/blinds are moved to the Position on reset of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation and operation via the direct and auto-matic communication objects is enabled again. The monitoring period is restarted after each receipt of a telegram, after the programming of the actuator and on bus voltage recovery. If the parameter Position for wind alarm has been set to no reaction, a wind alarm is not carried out for the respective output and the cyclical monitoring of the object is not taken into account. The same applies to the rain alarm and frost alarm functions.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
If more than one wind object has been assigned to a shutter/blind, the values in the associated communication objects Wind alarm no. X are logically linked via an OR gate i.e. if there is a wind alarm at one of the assigned communication objects (or a telegram is omitted within the monitoring period), the shutter/blind remains in the Position for wind alarm until there are no wind alarms at any of the assigned objects. Telegram value: 0: No alarm (operation enabled) 1: Alarm (operation blocked) Block If a telegram with the value 0 is received at this communication object, the output can be operated via the direct and automatic communication objects. If a telegram with the value 1 is received, the output moves to the set Position for blocking. The operation of the output via the direct and automatic communication objects is disabled. If a telegram with the value 0 is received for the rst time after a 1, the shutter/blind moves into the Position on reset of wind alarm, blocking and forced operation and operation via the direct and auto-matic communication objects is enabled again. Telegram value: 0: Operation enabled 1: Operation blocked Forced operation If a telegram with the value 2 (binary 10) is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind is raised. Operation via the direct and automatic communication objects is blocked. If a telegram with the value 3 (binary 11) is received, the shutter/ blind is lowered. Operation via the direct and automatic communi-cation objects is blocked. If a telegram with the value 0 (binary 00) or 1 (binary 01) is received at this communication object, the shutter/blind moves into the Position on reset of wind alarm, blocking and forced operation and operation via the direct and automatic communi-cation objects is enabled again.
Telegram value: 0 (binary 00): Operation enabled 1 (binary 01): Operation enabled 2 (binary 10): UP/operation blocked 3 (binary 11): DOWN/operation blocked Status response communication objects Never set the Write-ag for Status response communication objects! The Status response communication objects dont send their value, in case the value has not been actualized, e.g. if no reference position has been reached after a bus voltage break down! Telegr. status of position 0...255 The Shutter Actuator sends the current position of the shutter/blind to this communication object. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a movement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed. Telegram value: 0: Top ...: Intermediate position 255: Bottom Telegr. status of louvres 0...255 The Shutter Actuator sends the current position of the louvres to this communication object. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a movement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed. Telegram value: 0: Louvres opened to maximum ...: Intermediate position 255: Louvres closed
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Telegr. status of upper position The Shutter Actuator sends the information to this communication object as to whether the shutter/blind is located in the upper limit position or not. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a movement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed. Telegram value: 0: Shutter/blind not in upper limit position 1: Shutter/blind in upper limit position Telegr. status of lower position The Shutter Actuator sends the information to this communication object as to whether the shutter/blind is located in the lower limit position or not. The current position is sent approx. 5 seconds after the completion of a movement. If a new movement is started in the meantime, the current position is only sent once the last action has been completed. Telegram value: 0: Shutter/blind not in lower limit position 1: Shutter/blind in lower limit position If on both communication objects Telegr. status of upper position and Telegr. status of lower position a 1 is sent at the same time, the actuator does not know the position of the shutter/blind. The values of the position communication objects are not valid! Telegr. status of operation The Shutter Actuator sends the information to this communication object as to whether operation via the direct and automatic communication objects has been enabled or disabled. Operation is disabled if one of the safety functions has been activated (e.g. wind alarm) or if the Shutter Actuator has been switched to manual operation (e.g. via the push button Man.) or if both, direct and automatic control is disabled via communication object. The status is sent after a change.
Telegram value: 0: Operation enabled 1: Operation blocked Telegr. status of automatic control The Shutter Actuator sends the information to this communication object as to whether automatic control (automatic sun protection or automatic heating/ cooling) has been activated. Automatic control is activated if a telegram with the value 1 has been received at the communication object Activation of automatic control and neither the safety functions nor manual operation have been activated. The status is sent after a change. Telegram value: 0: Automatic control not activated 1: Automatic control activated Telegr. status byte The Shutter Actuator sends the information about the current operating mode of the output to this communication object. Only one operating mode can be activated at the same time. The status byte is sent after a change. Telegram code: 76543210 0: Not activated 1: Activated 7: 6: 5: 4: 3: 2: 1: 0: Automatic sun protection Automatic heating/cooling Wind alarm Rain alarm Frost alarm Forced operation Block not used
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Communication objects in the operating mode Ventilation aps/switch mode

Ventilation aps Open-Closed/On-Off The output contact closes if a telegram with the value 1 is received at this communication object. The connected ventilation aps are thereby opened or the connected loads are switched on. If a telegram with the value 0 is received, the ventilation aps are closed or the loads are switched off. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. Telegram value: 1: Open/On 0: Closed/Off Safety communication objects The safety communication objects Wind alarm no. X Rain alarm Frost alarm Block Forced operation
Operation is blocked if one of the safety functions has been activated (e.g. wind alarm) or if the Shutter Actuator has been switched to manual operation (e.g. via the push button Man.). The operational status is sent after a change. Telegram value: 0: Operation enabled 1: Operation blocked Telegr. status byte The Shutter Actuator sends the information about the current operating mode of the output to this communication object. Only one operating mode can be activated at the same time. The status byte is sent after a change. Telegram code: 76543210 0: Not activated 1: Activated 7: 6: 5: 4: 3: 2: 1: 0: 0 (not used) 0 (not used) Wind alarm Rain alarm Frost alarm Forced operation Block not used
carry out the same function in the operating mode Ventilation aps/switch mode as in the operating modes Shutter and Blinds.
Telegr. status Open-Closed/On-Off If the Shutter Actuator sends the information to this communication object as to whether the ventilation aps are opened or closed or the connected loads are switched on or off. The current status is always sent after a change. Telegram value: 0: Ventilation aps CLOSED/ switch contact OFF 1: Ventilation aps OPEN/ switch contact ON Telegr. status of operation The Shutter Actuator sends the information to this communication object as to whether operation has been enabled or blocked via the communication objects Ventilations aps Open-Closed/ On-Off and Scene.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Parameters
Some of the parameters of the application program can be hidden or displayed via the button High Access/ Low Access. The default values are deseribed in the technical data sheets. AX - Safety parameter window Order of priority for safety functions For dening the priority between the safety functions of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation. Order of priority for weather alarm functions For dening the priority between the weather alarm functions of wind alarm, rain alarm and frost alarm. Communication object no. X for wind alarm If the option activated is selected, the communication object Wind alarm no. X appears. Monitoring period for wind alarm [s] Monitoring period for rain alarm [s] Monitoring period for frost alarm [s] For setting the monitoring period for the wind alarm, rain alarm or frost alarm in seconds. The monitoring period in the Shutter Actuator should be at least twice as long as the cyclical sending time of the sensor so that the shutters/blinds are not immediately moved to the alarm position due to the negligible omission of a signal (e.g. due to a high bus load). If the value of this parameter is set to 0, the monitoring of the communication object is deactivated. Rain alarm Frost alarm If the option activated is selected, the communication object Rain alarm or Frost alarm appears.
The parameters for the operating modes Shutter and Blinds are described in the following section. Position on bus voltage failure For setting the behaviour on bus voltage failure. If the option no reaction is set, the output contacts remain in their current position. In the option Stop, the shutter/ blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. Position on bus voltage recovery For setting the behaviour on bus voltage recovery. If the option no reaction is set, the output contacts remain in their current position. In the option Stop, the shutter/ blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option Position X is selected, the shutter/blind rst moves right to the top after bus voltage recovery (reference movement) before it travels to the set position. Position after programming and bus reset For setting the behaviour after programming or bus reset. If the option no reaction is set, the output contacts remain in their current position. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option Position X is selected, the shutter/blind rst moves right to the top after programming (reference movement) before it travels to the set position. Automatic control The communication objects Activation of automatic control and Sun as well as the parameter window Auto 1 appear if the option activated is selected. 8 bit scene If the option yes is selected, both the communication object Scene and the parameter window Scene appear.
Parameters in the operating modes Shutter and Blinds

A - General parameter window Operating mode The operating mode is set via this parameter. The communication objects and the parameters for the respective output differ depending on the operating mode.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Position after reference movement If the option no reaction or back to saved position is selected, the communication object Reference movement appears. This parameter species how the Shutter Actuator behaves after a reference movement. If the option no reaction is set, the shutter/blind remains in the reference position i.e. right at the top or right at the bottom. If the option back to the saved position is set, the shutter/blind is moved back to the position it occupied prior to the reference movement. If automatic control was activated for the shutter/blind prior to the reference movement, automatic control is reactivated once the saved position has been reached. Drive parameter window Total travel time [s] For setting the total travel time in seconds. Duration of louvre adjustment [ms] (only in the Blinds operating mode) For setting the duration of louvre adjustment in milliseconds. Pause on change in direction [ms] For setting the pause on change in direction in milliseconds. The technical data supplied by the manufacturer of the drive must be taken into account! Max. number of louvre adjustments (only in the Blinds operating mode) For setting the maximum number of louvre adjustments. Start-up delay [ms] For setting the start-up delay for the drive in milliseconds. Deceleration delay [ms] For setting the deceleration delay for the drive in milliseconds. Limit travelling range If the option yes is selected, the communication object Shutter Up-Down limited or Blinds Up-down limited appears together with the parameters Upper limit and Lower limit. Upper limit 0..100 % Lower limit 0..100 % For setting the upper or lower limit of the travelling range.
Safety parameter window Output reacts to communication object for wind alarm no. This parameter species which wind alarm objects the output reacts to. The values of the linked communication objects are connected with an OR function. This parameter must be set to Output does not react on wind alarm if no wind alarm communication object is used! Position for wind alarm Position for rain alarm Position for frost alarm For setting the behaviour in the event of a weather alarm. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option no reaction is set, the current movement is carried out in full. If the option deactivated is selected, this output does not react to either an alarm or to the monitoring period. Disable via communication object If the option activated is selected, the communication object Block appears as well as the parameter Position for blocking. Position for blocking For setting the behaviour during disable mode. If the option no reaction is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. Forced operation (2 bit) The communication object Forced operation appears if the option activated is selected. Position on reset of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation This parameter denes how the output behaves after a safety alarm. If the option no reaction is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
In the option move to saved position, the shutter/blind moves to the position it occupied prior to the safety alarm. If automatic control was activated when the safety alarm occurred, it is reactivated. If in the meantime telegramms are received on the move to position objects (e.g. Move to position 1/2 or Move to position 0255), the shutter/blind will be positioned accordingly. Status parameter window Send position: 0255 If the option yes is selected, the communication objects Telegr. status of position (Shutter and Blinds operating modes) and Telegr. status of louvres (only in Blinds operating mode) appear. Send position: limit position reached If the option yes is selected, the communication objects Telegr. status of upper position and Telegr. status of lower position appear. Send status of operation If the option yes is selected, the communication object Telegr. status of operation appears. Send status of automatic control If the option yes is selected, the communication object Telegr. status of automatic control. This parameter is only visible, if the option activated is selected for the parameter Automatic control in the General parameter window. Send status byte The communication object Telegr. status byte appears if the option yes is selected. Pos. 1 parameter window Move to position 0...255 If the option activated is selected, the communication objects Move to position 0...255 (in Shutter and Blinds operating modes) as well as Move louvres 0...255 (only in Blinds operating mode).
Objects for Move to position Objects for Set position If the option activated is selected, the communication objects Move to position 1/2 and Set position 1/2 or Move to position 3/4 and Set position 3/4 appear as well as the parameter window Pos. 2. Move to position If the option directly is selected, the shutter/blind moves directly from the current position to the new target position. If the option indirectly via top or indirectly via bottom is selected, the shutter/blind rst moves completely up or completely down and then into the target position. If the option indirectly via shortest way is selected, the shutter/blind rst moves completely up or completely down, depending on which detour is the shortest, and then into the target position. Pos. 2 parameter window Overwrite preset values during download Options: yes no This parameter denes whether the preset values stored in the Shutter Actuator should be overwritten during a download with the parameterised preset values. If the option yes is selected, the communication objects Position X: Blinds 0100 % and Position X: Louvres 0100 % appear. If individual preset values have already been specied by the user during operation, this parameter should be set to no so that these individual positions are retained. Position X: Shutter 0...100 % or Position X: Blinds 0...100 % For setting the preset value for the height of the shutter/blind when moving into a preset position. Position X: Louvres 0...100 % For setting the preset value for louvre adjustment when moving into a preset position.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Auto 1 parameter window This parameter window is only visible, if the option activated is selected for the parameter Automatic control in the General parameter window. Deactivation of automatic control This parameter denes whether automatic control should only be deactivated via the communication object Activation of automatic control or via the direct communication objects in addition. If the second option is selected and a telegram is received at a direct communication object when automatic control is activated, automatic control is deactivated and the direct movement command is carried out. Toggling to automatic control Toggling to direct operation This parameter species whether toggling to automatic control or direct operation is enabled or disabled. If the option enable/disable via communication object is selected, the communication object Enable/disable automatic control or Enable/block direct operation appears. Position for sun = 1 (sun) For setting the behaviour if the sun = 1 (sun) in automatic sun protection mode. If the option receive position via 8 bit value is selected, the communication objects Move to position for sun 0...255 and Adjust louvres for sun 0..255 appear. If the option no reaction is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. Position for sun = 0 (no sun) For setting the behaviour if the sun = 0 (no sun) in automatic sun protection mode. If the option no reaction is set, the current movement is carried out in full. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. Delay for sun = 1 [s] Delay for sun = 0 [s] For setting the delay in seconds when activating the Position for sun = 1 or Position for sun = 0.
Automatic heating/cooling If the option activated is selected, the communication objects Presence, Heating and Cooling appear as well as the parameter window Auto 2.
Auto 2 parameter window This parameter window is only visible, if the option activated is selected for the parameter Automatic heating/cooling in the Auto 1 parameter window. Delay for presence = 0 [s] Delay for presence = 1 [s] For setting the delay in seconds when toggling between automatic sun protection and automatic heating/cooling. Position for heating = X and sun = X For setting the behaviour when the sun = 1 (sun) or sun = 0 (no sun) in heating mode (Heating = 1) or in cooling mode (Cooling = 1). If the option no reaction is set, the outputs remain in their current position. In the option Stop, the shutter/blind is halted immediately. The output contact reverts to the neutral position. Scene parameter window This parameter window is only visible, if the option activated is selected for the parameter 8-bit-scene in the General parameter window. Scene assignment (X) This parameter denes into which scenes the shutter/blind should be integrated. Each shutter/blind can be integrated in up to 10 out of a total of 64 scenes per group address.
Parameters in the operating mode Ventilation aps/ switch mode

A - General parameter window Operating mode The operating mode is set via this parameter. The communication objects and the parameters for the respective output differ according to the operating mode. The following section describes the parameters for the operating mode Ventilation aps/switch mode.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Position on bus voltage failure For setting the behaviour on bus voltage failure. In the option ClosedOff, the output contact reverts to the neutral position. Position on bus voltage recovery For setting the behaviour on bus voltage recovery. In the option Closed-Off, the output contact reverts to the neutral position. Position after programming and bus reset For setting the behaviour after programming or bus reset. In the option Closed-Off, the output contact reverts to the neutral position.
Position for blocking For setting the behaviour during disable mode. If the option no reaction is set, the output contacts remain in their current position. In the option Closed-Off, the output contact reverts to the neutral position. Forced operation (2 bit) The communication object Forced operation appears if the option activated is selected. Position on reset of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation This parameter denes how the output behaves after a safety alarm. If the option no reaction is set, the output contacts remain in their current position. In the option Closed, the output contact reverts to the neutral position. Status parameter window Send position: Open-Closed/On-Off If the option yes is selected, the communication object Telegr. status Open-Closed/On-Off appears. Send status of operation If the option yes is selected, the communication object Telegr. status of operation appears. Send status byte The communication object Telegr. status byte appears if the option yes is selected.
Staircase lighting function The staircase lighting function is activated via this parameter. If activated is selected, the parameter Duration/opening time for staircase lighting appears. Duration/opening time for staircase lighting [s] For setting the duration/opening time for staircase lighting in seconds. Safety parameter window Output reacts to communication object for wind alarm no. This parameter denes which wind alarm objects the output reacts to. The values of the linked communi-cation objects are connected via an OR function. Position for wind alarm Position for rain alarm Position for frost alarm For setting the behaviour in the event of a weather alarm. In the option Closed-Off, the output contact reverts to the neutral position. If the option no reaction is set, the current movement is carried out in full. If the option deactivated is selected, this output does not react to an alarm or to the monitoring period. Disable via communication object If the option activated is selected, the communication object Block appears as well as the parameter Position for blocking.
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Direct communication objects in Blinds operating mode using Output A as an example
No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 21 No. 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte
Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A
Function Move blinds Up-Down Louvre adj./Stop Up-Down Move to position 0255 Move louvres 0...255 Move to position 1/2 Move to position 3/4 Set position 1/2 Set position 3/4 Blinds Up-Down limited Reference movement Scene Function Move shutter Up-Down Stop Up-Down Move to position 0255 Move to position 1/2 Move to position 3/4 Set position 1/2 Set position 3/4 Shutter Up-Down limited Reference movement Scene
Direct communication objects in Shutter operating mode using Output A as an example
Automatic communication objects in Blinds operating mode using Output A as an example
No. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 No. 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A
Function Activation of automatic control Sun Move to position for sun 0255 Adjust louvres for sun 0255 Presence Heating Cooling Enable/disable automatic control Enable/block direct operation Function Activation of automatic control Sun Move to position for sun 0...255 Presence Heating Cooling Enable/disable automatic control Enable/block direct operation
Automatic communication objects in Shutter operating mode using Output A as an example
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Safety communication objects All operating modes General for all outputs A...H or using Output A as an example
No. 1 2 3 4 5 31 32
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 2 bit
Object name Output A...H Output A...H Output A...H Output A...H Output A...H Output A Output A
Function Wind alarm no. 1 Wind alarm no. 2 Wind alarm no. 3 Rain alarm Frost alarm Block Forced operation
Status response communication objects In the Blinds operating mode using Output A as an example
7
Status response communication objects In the Shutter operating mode using Output A as an example
No. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
Type 1 byte 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte
Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A
Function Telegr. status of position Telegr. status of louvres Telegr. status of upper position Telegr. status of lower position Telegr. status of operation Telegr. status of automatic control Telegr. status byte
No. 33 35 36 37 38 39
Type 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte
Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A Output A
Function Telegr. status of position Telegr. status of upper position Telegr. status of lower position Telegr. status of operation Telegr. status of automatic control Telegr. status byte
Other communication objects In the operating mode Ventilation aps/switch mode using Output A as an example
No. 11 37 38 39
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte
Object name Output A Output A Output A Output A
Function Ventilation aps Open-Closed/On-Off Telegr. status Open-Closed/On-Off Telegr. status of operation Telegr. status byte
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
General parameters General for all outputs A...H. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
AX - Safety parameter window Order of priority for safety functions
Order of priority for weather alarm functions
Communication object no. 1 for wind alarm Communication object no. 2 for wind alarm Communication object no. 3 for wind alarm Monitoring period for wind alarm [s] Rain alarm Only if activated: Monitoring period for rain alarm [s] Frost alarm Only if activated: Monitoring period for frost alarm [s]
1.Weather alarm-2.Block-3.Forced operation 1.Weather alarm-2.Forced operation-3.Block 1.Block-2.Weather alarm-3.Forced operation 1.Block-2.Forced operation-3.Weather alarm 1.Forced operation-2.Block-3.Weather alarm 1.Forced operation-2.Weather alarm-3.Block 1.Wind alarm-2.Rain alarm-3.Frost alarm 1.Wind alarm-2.Frost alarm-3.Rain alarm 1.Rain alarm-2.Wind alarm-3.Frost alarm 1.Rain alarm-2.Frost alarm-3.Wind alarm 1.Frost alarm-2.Rain alarm-3.Wind alarm 1.Frost alarm-2.Wind alarm-3.Rain alarm activated/deactivated activated/deactivated activated/deactivated 0..1,000 (0) activated/deactivated 0..1,000 (0) activated/deactivated 0..1,000 (0)
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Parameters Separate for each output in the operating modes Shutter and Blinds. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
A - General parameter window Operating mode Position on bus voltage failure Position on bus voltage recovery Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 Position after programming and bus reset Automatic control 8 bit scene Position after reference movement
Shutter/Blinds/ Ventilation aps/switch mode no reaction/Up/Down/Stop no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 activated/deactivated activated/deactivated no reaction/ move to saved position/deactivated
Drive parameter window Total travel time [s] Only if Operating mode = Blinds Duration of louvre adjustment [ms] Pause on change in direction Only if Operating mode = Blinds Max. number of louvre adjustments Start-up delay [ms] Deceleration delay [ms] Limit travelling range Only if yes is selected: Upper limit 0...100 % (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Lower limit 0...100 % (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)
0..6,000 (60) 50..1,000 (200) 50..10,000 (500) 1..60 (7) 0..255 (0) 0..255 (0) yes/no 0..100 (0) 0..100 (100)
Safety parameter window Output reacts to communication object for wind alarm no. Position for wind alarm
Position for rain alarm
Position for frost alarm
Disable via communication object Only if activated Position for blocking Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 Forced operation Position on reset of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation
Output does not react on wind alarm/ 1/2/3/1+2/1+3/2+3/1+2+3 deactivated/ activated up/ activated down/ activated no reaction deactivated/ activated up/ activated down/ activated no reaction deactivated/ activated up/ activated down/ activated no reaction activated/deactivated no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ activated/deactivated no reaction/Stop/ move to saved position
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Status parameter window Send position: 0...255 Send position: limit position reached Send status of operation Only if Automatic control = activated Send status of automatic control Send status byte
yes/no yes/no yes/no
yes/no yes/no
Only if Move to position = activated Pos. 1 parameter window Move to position 0...255 (8 bit value) Objects for Move to Position (1 bit preset) Only if Objects for Move to Position = activated Objects for Set Position (1 bit preset) Move to position
activated/deactivated activated/deactivated
activated/deactivated directly/indirectly via top/indirectly via bottom/indirectly via shortest way
In the Blinds operating mode
Only if Objects for Move to Position = activated Pos. 2 parameter window Overwrite preset values during download yes/no only if Overwrite preset values during download = yes Position 1: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (20) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Position 1: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (20) (0 % = open; 100 % = closed) Position 2: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (40) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Position 2: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (40) (0 % = open; 100 % = closed) Only if Objects for Set Position = activated Position 3: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (60) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Position 3: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (60) (0 % = open; 100 % = closed) Position 4: Blinds 0...100 % 0...100 (80) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Position 4: Louvres 0...100 % 0...100 (80) (0 % = open; 100 % = closed)
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
In the Shutter operating mode
Only if Objects for Move to Position = activated Pos. 2 parameter window Overwrite preset values during download yes/no only if Overwrite preset values during download = yes Position 1: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (20) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Position 2: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (40) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Only if Objects for Set Position = activated Position 3: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (60) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom) Position 4: Shutter 0...100 % 0...100 (80) (0 % = top; 100 % = bottom)
Only if Automatic control = activated Auto 1 parameter window Deactivation of automatic control
7
Toggling to automatic control Toggling to direct operation Position for sun = 1 (sun) Position for sun = 0 (no sun) Delay for sun = 1 [s] Delay for sun = 0 [s] Automatic heating/cooling
via object Activation of automatic control/ via object Activation of automatic control and direct objects enabled/ enable/disable via communication object enabled/ enable/disable via communication object no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/ Position 1/Position 2/Position 3/Position 4/ receive position via 8 bit value no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/ Position 1/Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 0...6,000 (60) 0...6,000 (240) activated/deactivated
Only if Automatic heating/cooling = activated Auto 2 parameter window Delay for presence = 1 [s] 0...6,000 (0) Delay for presence = 0 [s] 0...6,000 (600) no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ Position for heating = 1 and sun = 1 Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 Position for heating = 1 and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = 0 Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 Position for cooling = 1 and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = 1 Position 2/Position 3/Position 4 Position for cooling = 1 and no reaction/Up/Down/Stop/Position 1/ sun = 0 Position 2/Position 3/Position 4
Only if 8 bit scene = activated Scene parameter window Scene assignment (1) Scene assignment (2) Scene assignment (3) Scene assignment (4) Scene assignment (5) Scene assignment (6) Scene assignment (7) Scene assignment (8) Scene assignment (9) Scene assignment (10)
no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63 no assignment/0...63
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Parameters Separate for each output in the operating mode Ventilation aps/switch mode. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
A - General parameter window Operating mode Position on bus voltage failure Position on bus voltage recovery Position after programming and bus reset Staircase lighting function Only if activated: Duration/opening time for staircase lighting [s]
Shutter/Blinds/ Ventilation aps/switch mode Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction activated/deactivated 0...30,000 (60)
Safety parameter window Output reacts to communication object for wind alarm no. Position for wind alarm
7
Position for rain alarm
Position for frost alarm
Disable via communication object Only if activated: Position for blocking Forced operation Position on reset of weather alarm, blocking and forced operation
Output does not react on wind alarm/ 1/2/3/1+2/1+3/2+3/1+2+3 activated closed-off/ activated open-on/ activated no reaction/ deactivated activated closed-off/ activated open-on/ activated no reaction/ deactivated activated closed-off/ activated open-on/ activated no reaction/ deactivated activated/deactivated Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction activated/deactivated Closed-Off/Open-On/no reaction
Status parameter window Send position: Open-Closed/On-Off Send status of operation Send status byte
yes/no yes/no yes/no
JA/S 8.230.1
JA/S 8.230.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Line Coupler, MDRC LK/S 4.1, 2CDG 110 027 R0011
2CDC 071 313 F0004
The coupler can be used as a line/ backbone coupler or as a line repeater. Used as a line coupler, it links a line to a main line. Used as an backbone coupler, it links a main line to the backbone line. In this respect it provides electrical isolation. At the same time telegrams can be ltered. In this way only the telegrams can be passed on, which are intended for the other respective line. For diagnostic purposes all telegrams can also be passed on or blocked.
Technical data Supply voltage Operating and display elements EIB green LED (1) red LED (6) and push button (7) yellow LED (2) yellow LED (3) 24 V DC, via the bus line ON, device is ready for operation For programming the physical address Telegram trafc on the primary line (main line) Telegram trafc on the secondary line (line) Left bus connection terminal Right bus connection terminal 5 C 45 C 25 C 70 C
Connections Type of protection Ambient temperature range Design Housing, color Mounting Dimensions Mounting depth/width Weight Certication Electrical safety
EIB, secondary line EIB, primary line IP 20, EN 60 529 Operation Storage/transport Modular installation device proM, MDRC Plastic housing, grey On 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60715 90 x 36 x 64 mm (H x W x D) 2 modules at 18 mm 0.075 kg EIB-certied
Degree of pollution (in acc. with IEC 60664-1): 2 Type of protection (in acc. with EN 60529): IP 20 Protection class (in acc. with IEC 61140): III Overvoltage category (in acc. with EN 60664-1): III Bus: safety extra low voltage SELV DC 24 V Device complies with EN 50090-2-2 and IEC 60664-1
EMC requirements
Complies with EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and EN 50090-2-2
LK/S 4.1
Page 1 of 6 LKS_41_TD_EN_V1-0 2CDC 502 035 D0201
LK/S 4.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Application programs Couple/1 Repeat/1
Number of communication objects 0 0
Max. no. of group addresses 0 0
Max. no. of assignments 0 0
Wiring diagram
1 2 3
ON Main Line Line
LK/S 4.1
ABB i-bus
8 7 6
1 = Main Line 2 = Line
1 2 3 4
Operational LED (On) LED for telegram trafc on primary/main line LED for telegram trafc on secondary line (line) Bus connection terminal for EIB connection of primary/main line
5 Bus connection terminal for EIB connection of secondary line (line) 6 Programming LED 7 Programming button 8 Label holder
SV/S 30.640.5
1 2 3
DR/S 4.1
LK/S 4.1
L1
SV/S 30.640.5
195 . . . 255V AC 50 . . . 60 Hz - 5 C. . .45 C
DR/S 4.1
ON
Bus Line
LK/S 4.1
1 2
30V DC I1 30V DC I2
30 V DC
Main Line Line
_ 640 mA I1 + I2 <
ABB i-bus EIB

R
ABB i-bus
ABB i-bus
ON
I >Imax
1 = Bus Line 2 = 30 V DC
1 = Main Line 2 = Line
Reset
30V DC
30V DC
A B
A: Line (secondary line) B: Main line (primary line)
LK/S 4.1
LK/S 4.1
2CDC 072 560 F0004
Reset
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Couple/1
Line/backbone coupler The coupler links two lines for data transfer, but isolates them electrically. If the coupler receives telegrams (for example during commissioning) which use a physical address as destination address, it compares the physical addresses of the sender and receiver with its own physical address and then decides whether it must route the telegrams or not. If the coupler has not yet received its own physical address, it can cause faults when commissioning other devices. The coupler reacts to telegrams with group addresses in accordance with its parameter settings. During normal operation (default setting), the coupler only routes those telegrams whose group addresses have been entered in its lter table. Particularly during commissioning and for diagnostic purposes, it may be a good idea to set the rst two parameters to Group telegrams main line -> line and Group telegrams line -> main line to route. If the EIB installation then functions without any errors after the commissioning of the sensors and actuators, the ETS program can calculate the correct lter table. The two parameters can now be reset to the default values again. The application must then be reprogrammed. The correct lter table is then transferred into the coupler. There is no space for main groups 14 and 15 in the lter table. They should therefore normally not be congured. If they are used however, the parameters Main group 14/15 must be set to route.
Selection in ETS2 ABB System components Coupler
If the coupler routes a telegram and does not receive an acknowledgement, or if a bus device nds a transmission error, the coupler repeats the telegram three times. With the parameters Repetitions if errors..., this behaviour can be set separately for both lines. These parameters should be left in the default setting. Normally, the coupler only acknowledges the telegrams which it routes. The parameters Telegram conrmation ... enable the coupler to acknowledge each telegram separately for both lines. These parameters should also be left in the default setting. Programming / download For programming the line coupler at least the primary line must be connected. If the secondary line is connected as well, then the LK/S can also be programmed from the secondary line.
LK/S 4.1
LK/S 4.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Parameters The default setting of the values is shown in bold type.
Group telegrams main line -> line Group telegrams line -> main line Main group 14/15 Repeat telegrams if errors on main line Repeat telegrams if errors on line Telegram conrmation on main line Telegram conrmation on line
route block lter route block lter route block yes no yes no always only if routed always only if routed
Explanation of the parameters
Group telegrams main line -> line Group telegrams line -> main line route All group telegrams are routed. Block No group telegrams are routed. lter Only group telegrams are routed which are entered in the lter table. The ETS 3 produces the lter table automatically. When using ETS2, the lter table must be calculated by clicking on the button Filter.
Repeat telegrams if errors on line Yes If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a telegram on the secondary line (line), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times. No The telegram is not repeated.
Telegram conrmation on main line Always Each telegram on the primary line (main line) is conrmed (ACK). only if routed Only telegrams which are to be routed are conrmed on the primary line (main line) (ACK).
Main group 14/15 route Group telegrams with the main group 14 + 15 (e.g. 14/1) are routed. Block Group telegrams with the main group 14 + 15 (e.g. 14/1) are not routed.
Telegram conrmation on line Always Each telegram on the secondary line (line) is conrmed (ACK). only if routed Only telegrams which are to be routed are conrmed on the secondary line (line) (ACK).
Repeat telegrams if errors on main line Yes If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a telegram on the primary line (main line), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times. No The telegram is not repeated.
LK/S 4.1
LK/S 4.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Repeat/1
Line repeater A coupler can also be used as a line repeater (repeater). In its function as a repeater, it links two line segments for data transfer, but isolates them electrically.
If an error occurs during the transmission of a telegram with the physical address of a receiver, the line repeater can repeat the telegram. This behaviour can be set separately for both line segments with the parameters Repeat if errors on line / on segment in physical addressed telegrams. If the line repeater routes a group telegram and does not receive an acknowledgement, or if a bus device nds a transmission error, the line repeater repeats the telegram three times. With the parameters Repeat if errors on line / on segment in group telegrams, this behaviour can be set separately for line and segment.
Selection in ETS2 ABB System components Coupler
Up to three line repeaters can be used behind a line coupler. As a result, up to four line segments can form a complete line. Each line segment must be supplied by a dedicated EIB/KNX power supply. The line repeaters do not have any lter tables. This means that a telegram is sent to all line segments irrespective of whether it is processed in the corresponding line segment. It is therefore not important whether the telegram has been triggered within the lines or whether it has been sent from the main line to the lines via the line coupler.
Backbone line Backbone coupler Main line Line coupler Line

R 4 1 64
R = Repeater
R 2 128 R 3 3
3
The EIB segments are each connected as secondary lines (left bus connection terminal) of the line repeater.
192
65
129
193
Segments
62 126 190 254
63
127
191
255
Line x (Part 0)
Line x Part 1
Line x Part 2
Line x Part 3
Connection of repeaters in a line
LK/S 4.1
LK/S 4.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Parameters The default setting of the values is shown in bold type.
Repeat if errors on line in physical addressed telegrams Repeat if errors on line in group telegrams Repeat if errors on segment in physical addressed telegrams Repeat if errors on segment in group telegrams
yes no yes no yes no yes no
Explanation of the parameters
Repeat if errors on line in physical addressed telegrams Yes If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a physically addressed telegram (e.g. when programming a device) on the primary line (here: line), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times. No The telegram is not repeated.
Repeat if errors on segment in physical addressed telegrams Yes If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a physically addressed telegram (e.g. when programming a device) on the secondary line (here: line segment), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times. No The telegram is not repeated.
Repeat if errors on line in group telegrams Yes If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a group telegram on the primary line (here: line), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times. No The telegram is not repeated.
Repeat if errors on segment in group telegrams Yes If a transmission error (e.g. due to missing receiver) is found when sending a group telegram on the secondary line (here: line segment), the telegram is repeated up to 3 times. No The telegram is not repeated.
LK/S 4.1
LK/S 4.1
NETxKNX
OPC Server 3.5
The basis of the NETxKNX OPC server is the NETxKNX technology, which proved its value so well in large projects, as to implement it also in small projects. integrator without any large effort. Usability and configuration of the system has been simplified so much that it can be used by any project
The system allows the control and - in connection with an applicable OPC client - the visualization of small to large KNX plants. It builds a connection between the world of KNX and other systems.
Experience and the know-how out of the large projects were used during development of the large
number of small systems. So the system has been realized in a very reliable, open and user friendly way. The OPC Server is provided with a variant of the NETxKNX MultiProject kernel, which takes place also in Projects please contact us). large systems. Therefore it is possible, to realize up to 100 ETS Projects in one plant (for more ETS-
therefore you can use the same ETS Structures (logical address areas) behind each Gateway. The logical address room of a KNX plant is extended, address collisions are not possible any more.
KNX Group addresses in the NETxKNX OPC System are extended with the IP address of the gateway,
maximum of data transfer with the amount of gateways: with 10 gateways the system reaches e.g. 100 telegrams per second, with 100 1.000 telegrams per second.
data transfer rate in the bus. If there are more gateways connected to the system, you can multiply the
overloaded. Telegrams will be sending to the KNX Bus in defined timestamps to ensure the maximum
The new KNX Telegram Overflow Manager of the server ensures that the KNX-Bus is not
You can also benefit from the stability, the large amount of features of the NETxKNX OPC server and the numerous possibilities of application.
The system consists of two parts: the OPC server and the OPC studio.
The OPC server is an autonomic program, which execute and controls all operations in the KNX plant. state.
The OPC studio is the interface between server and administrator, it is used only to analyse the actual
The extended OPC Studio allows telegram control with plain text description, extended filter the ETS(c) Projects and allow quick steps in the projects.
functionalities and data point value control. With the import functionality it is possible to directly import
This environment includes more valuable tools, which supports the administrator to manage, analyze and troubleshoot in the whole KNX project.
The functionality of the OPC server
KNX telegrams are converted by the gateways into LAN telegrams, which will be forwarded via the LAN to the NETxKNX Server. The server receives, analyses, checks for errors in, protocols and sends the data via the OPC interface to all connected OPC Clients. All events are logged in the LOG data and can be used for system analyses and troubleshooting. Every malfunction of a gateway will be detected, displayed and additionally logged.
A virtual model of the whole KNX-plant is administrated by the server. Each telegram definition is shown as a cell. In this cell not only the current value of the data point is stored, but also a list of further information (e.g. time of the last change). The current value of a cell can be checked on the cell monitor in the studio. The Event Processor is an extension of the NETxKNX Server kernel and makes complex, event based commands possible.
Basic functions of NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 UnifiedDriver for IP Routers, all IP gateway types can be used parallel
Device Monitor - physical addresses of the devices are listed in the OPC Server New N-Mesh Routing routing of data and telegrams between OPC Servers Redundancy allows coupling of two OPC Server for more Redundancy Up to 1000 Gateways can be managed Extended NETIP Tunnelling Engine
New Data types UI4 and UI8 allows data transfer with various values to the OPC Client
Event Processor cyclical, time referenced and event referenced actions can be defined in the Link Manager management of linked group addresses are realised directly with the OPC Server KNX Telegram Overflow Manager extended protection against KNX bus overload Gateway Manager extended gateway management Real Database Refresh - the update of the OPC Server database is done automatically Direct value scan from KNX devices for initialising the virtual model of the plant Extended address room the real address of the data point consists of the logical KNX address Data storage in ring memory up to 10 Mio. last sent/received telegrams are stored in a LOG-file Process view of the whole system is stored and automatically reloaded during the start of the server and the physical IP address Extended NETxKNX OPC Studio with new features and functionalities OPC Server
Workspace Management multiple workspaces can be managed
MultiProject Core multiple ETS Projects in one KNX plant
Very high data transfer up to 1.000 telegrams per second
Up to 100.000 telegram definitions
All official EIS data types are supported
Real time display of the telegram traffic with plain text description and additional information Reliability designed and developed for continuous operation And much more features In addition the OPC Server includes an integrated Project simulation, which allows without any connection to the gateways, to check and simulate offline the created project.
An Online-check the status of all connected gateways
When the system is switched online, the OPC Server allows the check for non reachable KNX devices. The server creates a list of these not reachable devices and this list can be monitored from each client (over a data point).
OPC Foundation specification OPC Data Access Server 2.05b Conformity is obligatory, also the OPC Foundation Compliance Tool (test results are available) permanent tests with the
Security in the KNX Network: The NETxKNX OPC server solution provides several variants for ensuring middle and high system stability. E.g. you may want to increase the security in the network with a MAIN / BACKUP server solution, solution with more NETxKNX OPC servers, the desired. or if you want, you could have a CLUSTER server possibilities of configuration leave nothing to be
Application areas:
to a worldwide standard in the KNX world. If you want to control the KNX devices for jalousie control, to include wind and weather data in the system, control the lighting based on usage, manage the heating / cooling system or secure your
The NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 can be used in almost all areas of building automation and has expanded
OPC Server 3.5 supports you optimally in the management of these duties and responsibilities. Awards:
building with WEB cams, the NETxKNX
received together with our partners at the
The NETxKNX OPC Server solutions enjoy a high international reputation, shown through the awards we
Light & Building trade fair 2004 as winner of the EIBA AWARD 2004 and at the
Light & Building trade fair 2006 as winner of the Architektur + Technology Award 2006
Modules and gateways 1):
Supported gateways: NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 Direct(KNX) NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 UnifiedDriver
(e.g. ABB IG/S, ABB IPR/S, IP Router from Siemens, Merten Berker, Gira, EibNode,)
for all KNX Interfaces
for all IP Routers and IP Interfaces
Extended Server interfaces:
SQL Database interface extension module (optional) LabVIEW(c) interface extension module (optional) WEB Server interface extension module (optional) DAM 6000 interface extension module (optional)
Micros Fidelio(c) Interface extension module (optional) Every other OPC DA 2.0 Server for LON, SPS, BACKNET, PROFIBUS and other systems can be integrated into the KNX system with the NETxLAB OPC Bridge.
Presented by:
) recommended from KNX Association.
For more information please contact: NETxAutomation Software GmbH Maria Theresia Strae 41 4600 Wels Austria
by NETxAutomation Software GmbH
Phone +43 (0) 7242 252 900 0 Fax. +43 (0) 7242 252 900 21 e-Mail: office@netxautomation.com Web: www.netxautomation.com
A Member of the KNX Association and OPC Foundation
NETxKNX
OPC Server 3.5
The baseline of the NETxKNX OPC server 3.5 is the NETxKNX technology, which is proofed on value in large projects, to implement also in small projects. without any large effort. New Features Unified drivers all IP gateway types can be Device monitoring on physical addresses used parallel Up to 1000 Gateways can be managed Usability and configuration of the system is very simplified, so it can be used from the project integrators
Extended OPC Studio with more functionalities
New data types
N-Mesh Routing and Redundancy
Application areas:
worldwide standard in the KNX world. If you want to control the KNX devices for jalousie control, to cooling system or secure your building with WEB optimally in the management of this duties and responsibilities.
The NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 is nearly useable in all areas of building automation and expands to a
include wind and weather data in the system, control the lightning usage based, manage the heating / cams, the NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 support you
NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 UnifiedDriver for all IP routers and IP Interfaces (e.g. ABB IG/S, ABB IPR/S, Merten, Siemens, eibNode,)
Recommended from KNX Association.
Supported gateways: NETxKNX OPC Server 3.5 Direct(KNX) for all KNX interfaces
Presented by:
For more information please contact: NETxAutomation Software GmbH Maria Theresia Strasse 41 4600 Wels Austria
by NETxAutomation Software GmbH
Phone +43 (0) 7242 252 900 0 Fax. +43 (0) 7242 252 900 21 e-Mail: office@netxautomation.com Web: www.netxautomation.com
Member of the KNX Association and OPC Foundation
New Product Bulletin

NP 106E
Building Management Systems and smart homes have become increasingly important over the past years.
Belden Offers KNX / EIB Approved Cables
To install and operate a building's management systems requires a wide range of technologies of different complexities. The control, monitoring and optimization of the various functions and services include heating and cooling, ventilation, lighting and often even the management of electric appliances. The basic control technologies have been in existence for some time. Systems are available in various degrees of complexity, ranging from the timer-controlled water heater or thermostatic radiator valves (TRVs), to the so-called intelligent houses which manage, according to prearranged efficiency criteria, everything from safety and security systems to air conditioning, and from lighting and ventilation systems to telematic services and domestic appliances.
KNX
KNX standard is based upon more than 15 years of experience in the market including its predecessors EIB, EHS and BatiBUS. In May 1999 the KNX Association cvba was formed from combining:
EIBA (European Installation Bus Association) EHSA (European Home Systems Association) BCI (BatiBUS Club International)
Its main objective is to promote the global standard for fieldbus applications in home and building control.
Standard offering from a registered manufacturer
KNX is approved as:
European Standard (CENELEC EN 50090

and CEN EN 13321-1)
For ease of identification, every module of the installation is identified by a selected address by means of either drum wheels, dip switches or keyboards with displays. Bus, star, ring, tree or any other combination can be installed as required, so this flexible architecture makes the system easy to extend. If the premises or the functions are modified, simply change the address list or connect an additional component to the bus. The bus communication is based on a screened twisted pair cable design and is available in 1 and 2 pair configurations as well as an LSNH version for use in public areas.
International Standard (ISO/IEC 14543-3) Chinese Standard (GB/Z 20965) US Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135)
KNX is user-friendly and simple, the physical layer is extremely easy to install with a remote power supply network and a totally open topology. One single KNX cable running throughout the building is all that is required to handle all the applications. This cable also powers the KNX sensors.
Part No.
Applicable Standard(s)
2
No. of Pairs
Color Code
Standard Lengths ft. m
Standard Unit Weight lbs. kg
Insulation Thickness inch mm
Outer Jacket Thickness inch mm
Nominal OD inch mm
0.8 mm (0.5 mm or AWG 20)

Solid BC PVC Insulation 100 % Foil Screen Green PVC Jacket KNX Reg. no. 109 / 7253 / 05 YE00819 EN 50090 CEN/TC 247 1 Red/Black 328 500 3280 100 500 1000 8.4 46.3 89.3 3.8 21 40.5 0.012 0.3 0.043 1.1 0.217 5.5
YE00820
EN 50090 CEN/TC 247
Red/Black White/Yellow
328 500 3280
100 500 1000
11.5 61.7 122.3
5.2 28.0 55.5
0.012
0.3
0.043
1.1
0.241
6.1
Solid BC PE Insulation 100 % Foil Screen Green LSNH Jacket KNX Reg. no. 109 / 7254 / 05 YE00905 IEC 60189-2 IEC 60332-1 1 Red/Black 328 1624 3280 100 500 1000 8.6 47.4 91.5 3.9 21.5 41.5 0.016 0.4 0.043 1.1 0.220 5.6
YE00906
IEC 60189-2 IEC 60332-1
Red/Black White/Yellow
328 1624 3280
100 500 1000
12.3 68.3 131.1
5.6 31.0 59.5
0.016
0.4
0.043
1.1
0.282
6.3
Copyright 2008, Belden Inc.
NP 106E
12.08
Belden Technical Support +31 (0) 77 3875 414
www.belden-emea.com
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Switch Actuator, x-fold, 16 A, MDRC SA/S x.16.1, 2CDG 110 0xx R0011
2CDC 071 056 F0005
The 16 A AC1 Switch Actuators are modular installation devices in proM design for installation in the distribution board on 35 mm mounting rails. The connection to the ABB i-bus EIB / KNX is implemented via Bus Connection Terminals. The device does not require an additional power supply. The actuators switch up to 8 independent electrical loads via potential free contacts.
The outputs are connected using screw terminals with combination drive head screws. Each output is controlled separately via the EIB / KNX. The switch actuators can be manually operated via an operating element which simultaneously indicates the switch status. The actuators are particularly suitable for switching ohmic loads.
6
Technical data Power supply Operating voltage Current consumption EIB / KNX Power consumption EIB / KNX SA/S - type Number of contacts (potential free) Un rated voltage In rated current Power loss per device at max. load AC1 operation (cos = 0.8) EN 60 947-4-1 Fluorescent lighting load AX to EN 60669-1 Minimum switching performance 21...30 V DC, made available by the bus < 12 mA Max. 250 mW 2.16.1 4.16.1 8.16.1 12.16.1 2 4 8 12 250 / 440 V AC (50/60 Hz) 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 2.0 W 4.0 W 8.0 W 10 W 16 A / 230 V 16 A / 250 V (70 F) 2)
Output nominal values
Output switching currents
Output life expectancy
Output switching times 1)
100 mA / 12 V 100 mA / 24 V DC current switching capacity (ohmic load) 16 A / 24 V DC Mechanical endurance > 3 x 106 Electrical endurance to IEC 60 947-4-1 AC1 (240 V/cos = 0.8) > 105 Max. number of relay position changes per output and minute, 2.16.1 4.16.1 60 30
Operations (state change) 8.16.1 15 12.16.1 10
if all relays are switched simultaneously. The position changes should be distributed equally within the minute. Max. number of relay position changes per output, and minute if only one relay is switched
Connections
EIB / KNX Load current circuits
Operating and display elements Housing Safety class Isolation category

1)
cable shoe Tightening torque Red LED and EIB / KNX push button Contact position indication IP 20 II Overvoltage category Pollution degree
120 120 120 120 Bus Connection Terminal, 0.8 mm , single core Screw terminal with universal head (PZ 1) 0.2...4 mm2 finely stranded, 2x (0.2 2.5 mm2) 0.2...6 mm2 single core, 2x (0.2 4 mm2) contact pin minimum 10 mm Max. 0.8 Nm for assignment of the physical address Relay lever to EN 60 529 to EN 61 140 III to EN 60 664-1 2 to EN 60 664-1
The specifications apply only after the bus voltage has been applied to the device for at least 30 seconds. The typical elementary delay of the relay is approx. 20 ms. 2) The maximum inrush-current peak (see table 2) may not be exceeded.
Table 1 Part 1: 16 A Switch Actuator SA/S x.16.1, technical data
SA/S x.16.1
Page 1 of 4 SAS_x161_TD_EN_V1-2 2CDC 505 051 D0202
SA/S x.16.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
EIB / KNX voltage Temperature range
Environment conditions Design
Weight Installation Mounting position Housing, colour Approvals CE mark
SELV 24 V DC (safety extra low voltage) Operation 5 C ... + 45 C Storage 25 C ... + 55 C Transport 25 C ... + 70 C humidity max. 93 %, without bedewing Modular DIN-Rail Component (MDRC) Modular installation device, ProM SA/S - type 2.16.1 4.16.1 8.16.1 12.16.1 Dimensions (H x W x D) 90 x W x 64 Width W in mm 36 72 144 216 Mounting width (modules at 18 mm) 2 4 8 12 Mounting depth in mm 64 64 64 64 In kg 0.15 0.25 0.46 0.65 On 35 mm mounting rail EN 60 715 As required Plastic housing, grey EIB / KNX nach EN 50 090-2-2 Certification In accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline
Table 1 Part 2: 16 A Switch Actuator SA/S x.16.1, technical data
Lamp loads Low-volt halogen lamps Dulux lamp Mercury-vapour lamp Switching performance (switching contact) Number of electronic ballasts (T5/T8, single element) 1) Lamps Fluorescent lamp T5 / T8
1)
Incandescent lamp load Uncompensated luminaire Parallel compensated DUO circuit Inductive transformer Electronic transformer Halogen lamp 230 V Uncompensated luminaire Parallel compensated Uncompensated luminaire Parallel compensated Max. peak inrush-current Ip (150 s) Max. peak inrush-current Ip (250 s) Max. peak inrush-current Ip (600 s) 18 W (ABB EVG 1x58 CF ) 24 W (ABB EVG-T5 1x24 CY) 36 W (ABB EVG 1x36 CF) 58 W (ABB EVG 1x58 CF) 80 W (Helvar EL 1x80 SC)
2330 W 2300 W 1500 W 1500 W 1200 W 1500 W 2300 W 1100 W 1100 W 2000 W 2000 W 400 A 320 A 200 A 23 23 14 11 10
For multiple element lamps or other types the number of electronic ballasts must be determined using the peak inrush current of the electronic ballasts.
Table 2: Lamp load for SA/S x.16.1
Application programs Type SA/S 2.16.1 SA/S 4.16.1 SA/S 8.16.1 SA/S 12.16.1 Name Switch 2f 16A/2 Switch 4f 16A/2 Switch 8f 16A/2 Switch 12f 16A/2 Max. number of communication objects 34 64 124 184 Max. number of group addresses 254 254 254 254 Max. number of associations 254 254 254 254
Table 3: Application programs SA/S x.16.1
SA/S x.16.1
SA/S x.16.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Note:
The programming requires the EIB Software Tool ETS2 V1.3 or higher. If the ETS3 is used a .VD3 type file must be imported. The application program is located within the ETS2 / ETS3 in the category ABB/output/Binary output, x-fold/switch, xf16/1 (x = 2, 4 or 8, number of outputs). Detailed information about the application can be found in the product manual for the Switch Actuators SA/S. This manual can be free downloaded under www.abb.de/eib.
Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
A 2 B 4
6
1
A 2
B 4
C 6
D 8
E 10
11
F 12
13
G 14
15
H 16
0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
SA/S 2.16.1
A
O I
SA/S 8.16.1
B
O I
5 1
2CDC 072 094 F0005
A
O I
B
O I
C
O I
D
O I
E
O I
F
O I
G
O I
H
O I
5 1 2 3 4
2CDC 072 101 F0005 2CDC 072 003 F0005
ABB i-bus
U n = 250 / 440 V~ I n = 16 A
ABB i-bus
U n = 250 / 440 V~ In = 16 A
2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Label carrier Programming button Programming LED Bus Connection Terminal
5 Contact position indicatior and manual operation 6 Load current circuits, per circuit 2 connection terminals
Note:
All-pole disconnection must be observed in order to avoid dangerous contact voltage which can develop via loads in other phases.
Dimension drawings
58 43.5 6.5
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0.8 Nm
SA/S 8.16.1
A B
O I O I
C
O I
D
O I
E
O I
F
O I
G
O I
H
O I
90
45
ABB i-bus
Un = 250 / 440 V~ In = 16 A
SA/S 2.16.1 B 36 mm 2 module widths
SA/S 4.16.1 72 mm 4 module widths
SA/S 8.16.1 144 mm 8 module widths
SA/S x.16.1
SA/S x.16.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
SA/S x.16.1
SA/S x.16.1
Sales information
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX

Switching with Feedback The new Switching Actuators Intelligent Installation Systems
ABB i-bus Switching Actuators:
It is hard to imagine modern building installations without EIB / KNX building system technology. Whether in office buildings, industrial buildings, hotels, hospitals or private homes: Modern building system technology offers greater safety, efficiency, convenience and flexibility. Now current detection leaves the door open for even greater intelligence in intelligent installation systems. Switching Actuators are used in any EIB system. They perform actions and ensure correct execution of sensor commands such as switching a lighting circuit.
The new ABB STOTZ-KONTAKT products represent a whole new generation of Switching Actuators. For the first time a current detection feature has been integrated into the 16 A and 20 A line (2, 4 and 8 channels) with significant effects on the safety and economy of all buildings.
Switching with Feedback
Detection means better monitoring and better controlling Load current detection starting at 200 mA allows for a range of specific functions in daily use of the installed ABB i-bus: A significant failure of any equipment is registered immediately. This also applies to detection of circuit breaks Current thresholds make operating states visible Continuous current monitoring allows preventive detection of failures/breakdowns In combination with a counter, operating hours can be recorded in real time and actuating cycles can be recorded Maintenance and repair work can be predicted and therefore scheduled in advance
allowing you to act and react more efficiently
Wide Range of Functions: A Single common Application with
With a single application program the new generation of Switching Actuators offers an extraordinary range of functions: Current detection, current threshold setting, time functions, switch-on/off delay, staircase lighting automation, scenes/presets, logic functions (AND, OR, XOR) as well as status feedback signals it's all possible with the new range of products.
Further functions
Continuous monitoring
Alongside all these features the devices also offer further functions: Forced operation and safety functions Reaction to threshold values (underrange and overrange) Control of electrothermal valve actuators (continuous control) Control of air conditioning devices (fan coil units) Selection of the preferred contact position in the event of bus voltage failure and recovery
Temporary increase
Temporary drop
Interruption
Switching operations
comprehensive Functionality
A complete product range... The new product range offers components from 2 to 12 outputs and from 6 A to 20 A. The devices are connected with the EIB / KNX and do not need any additional auxiliary power supply. Each output in the 10 20 A range has a manual operation possibility with switch position display. The contact rating in the product range has been increased. The actuators now have AC3, AX, C-load (200 F) performance.
Current detection SA/S
Lighting
Heating
Motor
Power infeed
ABB i-bus
...with simplified installation The use of a 6 mm terminal and a Combi-Head-Screw make connecting cables with large diameters and also looping through much easier and faster.
The innovative Device Family
The Switching Actuators are suitable for fitting in distribution boards or small housings for fast attachment on 35 mm DIN rails. The electrical connection is made via screw terminals. The connection to the EIB / KNX is made using the bus connection terminal.
You can download a detailed description of how to set parameters and start-up the system at: www.abb.de/eib
The new Range of Switching Actuators

n tio tec e d nt re e od rC e d Or AN 9E 7 7 g 16 t/k 40 . igh n e b b W
n tio ip r c s De
pe Ty
ur dC W a Lo M
Switch actuator, 6A-AC3 4fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 6A-AC3 8fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 6A-AC3 12fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 10AX-AC1 2fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 10AX-AC1 4fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 10AX-AC1 8fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 10AX-AC1 12fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 16A-AC1 2fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 16A-AC1 4fold, MDRC Switch actuator, 16A-AC1 8fold, MDRC
SA/S 4.6.1
2CDG110 036R0011 643849
0,13
SA/S 8.6.1
2CDG110 037R0011
644242
0,24
SA/S 12.6.1
2CDG110 038R0011 644235
0,30
SA/S 2.10.1
2CDG110 039R0011 644228
0,15
SA/S 4.10.1
2CDG110 040R0011
644211
0,25
SA/S 8.10.1
2CDG110 041R0011
644204
0,46
SA/S 12.10.1
12 2CDG110 042R0011
644198
0,65
SA/S 2.16.1
2CDG110 062R0011
648776
0,15
SA/S 4.16.1
2CDG110 063R0011
648769
0,25
SA/S 8.16.1
2CDG110 064R0011 648752
0,46
Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load 2fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 2.16.5S Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load 4fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 4.16.5S Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load 8fold, w. current detection, MDRC SA/S 8.16.5S Switch actuator, 16AX-AC3, C-Load 12fold, MDRC SA/S 12.16.5 Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load 2fold, w. current detection, MDRC Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load 4fold, w. current detection, MDRC Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load 8fold, w. current detection, MDRC Switch actuator, 20A-AC3, C-Load 12fold, MDRC
2CDG110 043R0011
644181
0,20
2CDG110 044R0011 643832
0,34
2CDG110 045R0011
644174
0,64
12 2CDG110 046R0011
644167
0,80
SA/S 2.20.1S
2CDG110 047R0011
644150
0,20
SA/S 4.20.1S
2CDG110 048R0011
644143
0,34
SA/S 8.20.1S
2CDG110 049R0011
644136
0,64
SA/S 12.20.1
12 2CDG110 050R0011
644129
0,80
Your EIB / KNX-Partner
Druck Nr. 2CDC 505 055 B0201 Stand: 03 / 2005
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply, 640 mA, MDRC SU/S 30.640.1, GH Q631 0049 R0111
1
The Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply produces and monitors the EIB / KNX system voltage. The bus line is decoupled from the power supply with the integrated choke. The power supply is connected to the bus line with a bus connection terminal. A reset is triggered by pressing the reset push button and lasts for 20 seconds (regardless of the duration of the push button action). The bus line is disconnected from the power supply and the bus devices connected to this bus line are returned to their initial state. If the line should be disconnected for a longer period, the bus connection terminal must be removed from the power supply. Up to two 12 V sealed lead acid batteries can be connected as a back-up energy supply for the EIB / KNX system voltage in the event of mains failures. The batteries are charged via the SU/S 30.640.1 during normal operation. The charging voltage is temperature-controlled using a temperature sensor. If a mains failure occurs, the SU/S 30.640.1 is then supplied by the batteries. The temperature sensor must always be connected to ensure that the battery is charged correctly! A fault in the Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply is reported and stored via a potential-free changeover contact. The following faults cause a switching operation at the changeover contact: mains failure, battery fault, overvoltage and overload or short circuit.
Technical data Power supply Power supply Power consumption Power loss Number Output voltage Nominal current Sustained short-circuit current Mains failure back-up time (without connected battery) Battery type Number Nominal voltage Battery capacity Mains failure back-up time Nominal charging current of battery 230 V AC +10/15%, 45 ... 65 Hz < 60 VA < 10 W 1 line with integrated choke 30 V DC +1/2 V, SELV 640 mA, short circuit proof < 1.5 A 200 ms Sealed lead acid battery Max. 2 in parallel 12 V DC Preferably 1 Ah, 7 Ah, 12 Ah, 17 Ah Dependent on battery capacity 650 mA (terminals 9 + 10), for battery capacities > 5 Ah 150 mA (terminals 8 + 10) for battery capacities < 5 Ah Temperature-controlled adjustment of charging voltage via temperature sensor 230 V AC or 12/24 V AC/DC 6 A AC or 4 A DC 100 mA (at U < 30 V AC/DC) ON: output voltage is OK I>Imax: overload or short circuit Reset starts when the push button is pressed and lasts 20 s Reset at the EIB / KNX output Main voltage is OK Battery is OK
EIB / KNX output
Battery back-up
SK 0037 B 02
Temperature control
Potential-free changeover contact
Nominal voltage Max. switching current Min. switching current
Operating and display elements
Green LED Red LED Reset push button Red LED Green LED Green LED
SU/S 30.640.1
Page 1 of 4 SUS_306401_TD_EN_V2-1 2CDC 501 023 D0203
SU/S 30.640.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
1
Connections Power supply Battery connection Temperature sensor Changeover contact Cable cross-section for all screw terminals EIB / KNX output IP 20, EN 60 529 Operation Storage Transport Modular installation device, proM Plastic housing, grey On 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60 715 90 x 144 x 64.5 mm (H x W x D) 68 mm/ 8 modules at 18 mm 0.5 kg EIB / KNX-certified In accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline 5 C ... + 45 C 25 C ... + 55 C 25 C ... + 70 C 3 screw terminals 2 screw terminals 2 screw terminals 3 screw terminals multi-core 0.2 2.5 mm2 single-core 0.2 4.0 mm2 Bus connection terminal (black/red)
Design Housing, colour Mounting Dimensions Mounting depth/width Weight Certification CE norm
SU/S 30.640.1
SU/S 30.640.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
1
Dimension drawing
58 43.5 6.5
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
144
L1
SU/S 30.640.1
230V AC 50 / 60 Hz 12V 30V - 5 C. . .45 C 30V DC 640 mA
OK
90
45
ABB i-bus EIB

R
230V OK
OK
ON
I > Imax
12V
Reset
10
30V DC
Device connection
L N L N
14
L1
SU/S 30.640.1 OK
230V AC 50 / 60 Hz 12V 30V - 5 C. . .45 C 30V DC 640 mA
1 2
SK 0016 Z 02
7 6 13 12 11 10
ABB i-bus EIB

R
3
OK ON I > Imax
230V OK
4 5 8
12V Reset
10
30V DC
C > 5Ah
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Green LED (output voltage OK) Red LED (overload/short circuit) Label carrier Red LED (reset) Reset push button Green LED (mains voltage OK) Green LED (battery OK)
8 Bus connection terminal 9 Mains supply 10 Battery connection + 11 Battery 650 mA/Temp. sensor 12 Battery 150 mA/Temp. sensor 13 Connection for temperature sensor + 14 Connection for potential-free changeover contact
Note
During normal operation, the potential-free changeover contact is closed between terminals 4 and 5. In case of a fault, it is closed between terminals 5 and 6. If a total battery capacity of less than 5 Ah is connected to the Uninterruptible EIB / KNX Power Supply SU/S 30.640.1, the battery is connected to terminals 8 (150 mA ) and 10 (12 V +) while the temperature sensor is connected to terminals 7 () and 9 (Code/650 mA ).
If a total battery capacity of more than 5 Ah is used, the battery is connected to terminals 9 (Code/650 mA ) and 10 (12 V +) while the temperature sensor is connected to terminals 7 () and 8 (150 mA). If a battery is used, the temperature sensor must always be connected!
SU/S 30.640.1
SU/S 30.640.1
SK 0036 Z02
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
1
Installation and commissioning Switch on the mains voltage once the device has been correctly installed. The green ON LED and the green 230 V OK LED light up. If a battery is connected, the green Battery OK LED also lights up. All the other LEDs are switched off. The device is functioning correctly. The battery test is carried out automatically at 15 minute intervals. It can take up to 15 minutes after switching on the mains voltage until a possible battery fault is indicated. It can also take 15 minutes for the Battery OK LED to relight up once the cause of the fault has been rectified. A battery test can be triggered manually by pressing the reset push button. In this case, a reset is always carried out simultaneously. If a faulty battery is connected or the polarity of the battery connection is reversed, the green ON LED for the battery flashes.
SU/S 30.640.1
SU/S 30.640.1
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX
Watchdog sensor 180 comfort with multi-lens, FM Type: 6122-xx-500

Contents
Technical data Application programs (List) Circuit diagrams in combination with Bus coupler FM (6120-102-500): Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /1 in combination with Switch actuator/sensor FM (6110 U-101-500): Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /2 2-2 2-3 2-3
2-4
2 - 10
May 2007
2 - 1
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

The watchdog sensor application module is placed on a flush-mounted bus coupler or switch actuator/sensor. In addition to motion detection, the sensor can pick up movement within a certain period using its integrated monitoring function. It is therefore possible to integrate the sensor in event signalling systems. The movement detector also has a photo-electric sensor function. This function triggers telegrams when the brightness level exceeds or falls below set values. Using a slide switch, the movement detector can switch between the three operating modes ON / AUTOMATIC / OFF. The switch can be locked in the neutral position using the screw supplied. The recovery time and the sensitivity of the integrated photo-electric switch can be set using the two potentiometers at the back of the movement detector or via the parameters in ETS. It is also available with a multi-lens and modified detection range (see diagram).
Technical data Power supply Operating and display elements EIB Slide switch Potentiometer Potentiometer Flush-mounted bus coupler or Flush-mounted switch actuator/sensor IP 20, EN 60 529 mounted on the bus coupler Operation Storage Transport solo 24 V DC, via the bus line Photo-electric sensor 5 1000 Lx Recovery time 10 s 17 min 10-pole plug connector
Connections Type of protection Ambient temperature range Design / colour
future
carat
- 5 C 45 C - 25 C 55 C - 25 C 70 C savanna / ivory davos / studio white manhatten / graphite samoa / light green toscana / crimson attica / blue-grey savanna / ivory davos / studio white manhatten / graphite stone / light grey anthracite savanna / ivory davos / studio white
Mounting Dimensions Weight Certification CE norm
latched onto flush-mounted unit 63 x 63 mm (H x W) 0.04 kg EIB-certified in accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline
Detection range with multi-lens
Normal detection range
2 - 2
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Number of communication objects 12 Max. number of group addresses 21 Max. number of associations 21
Application programs For flush-mounted bus coupler: Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /1 For flush-mounted switch actuator/sensor: Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /2
12
21
21
Circuit diagram 4 1
1 Bus cable 2 Bus terminal 3 Flush-mounted bus coupler
4 Adapter for adjustments 5 Slide switch 6 Application module
May 2007
2 - 3
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Using this application program, the movement detector can pick up movement in its detection range and send switching or value telegrams. When assigning parameters, it should be noted that some parameters are only visible when High Access is selected and can only be modified at this point. The setting of the threshold for the light sensor as well as the recovery time can be carried out using the potentiometer at the back of the movement detector. There is also a separate setting aid. Alternatively, the settings can be carried out in ETS. To do this, the parameter settings should be changed from Potentiometer to ETS. With the parameter Threshold, it is possible to indicate which brightness value triggers the movement detector. The value 0 means dark while 255 means maximum brightness. The recovery time can be set with the two parameters Time base of recovery time and Time factor of recovery time. The base and factor are multiplied to produce the recovery time: Recovery time = Base * Factor The operating mode of the movement detector can be set via the slide switch. If the slide switch is moved into position 1, the movement detector sends a 1 to its communication object Movement / Telegr. switch. If it is moved into position 0, it sends a 0. The modified operating mode is thus transferred on the bus. In both cases, the monitoring function is inactive. The current status of the slide switch is sent on the bus via the object Movement / Activation. It is therefore guaranteed that other movement detectors assume the operating mode simultaneously. Switch The movement detector sends switching telegrams to the communication object Movement / Telegr. switch when it picks up some movement in its detection range. The value of the switching telegram can be set with the parameter Sending at detection. It is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram when movement is detected. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. If the movement detector senses no further movement once the recovery time has elapsed, it is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically in this case. This is determined with the parameter Telegram after recovery time. It is also possible to disable the movement detector. The communication object Movement / Activation is used for this. It is visibly switched with the parameter Activation object movement. The movement detector is activated or deactivated if a telegram is received at this object. With the parameter At ... movement, it can be set whether an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram is sent once via the communication object Movement / Telegr. switch. Example: In a functional building, all the movement detectors are enabled in the morning at a specific time. To do this, a 1 is sent with a time switch to the control centre and received at the communication object Movement / Activation. In this example, the parameter Enabling movement at is set to ON telegram. Value It is also possible to send values when movement is detected. To do this, the parameter Type of movement object must be changed to Value (EIS 6). Dimming actuators can for example be dimmed to a value that is smaller than the maximum value. The parameter settings Sending at the beginning/end of the detection, determine the size of the value that is sent. The option no telegram can also be selected.
Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /1
1 lx, PIR
Selection in ETS ABB Phys. Sensors Movement
2 - 4
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Cyclic All switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically. It should be ensured that the setting ON telegram cyclically or OFF telegram cyclically is selected in the respective parameter. The total cyclic time can be set with the parameters Time base for cyclical sending and Time factor for cyclic sending. The cyclic sending interval for a telegram is calculated by combining the base and factor: Cyclic time = Base * Factor Monitoring Note: The Monitoring function does not serve to create a VdS certified alarm system. It offers the possibility to use the EIB/ KNX-system to control rooms. It is not an alternative for an alarm system. It is possible to activate a monitoring function. To do so, the general parameter Monitoring function must be set to yes. The monitoring function is not triggered at the slightest thermal movement but only if a strong energy source is registered during a short interval or several weak sources over a longer period. If the monitoring function is activated, a further communication object Signal Telegr. switch is available. The presence detector records the number and intensity of movements within a time period and only sends telegrams once a specific sensitivity level has been exceeded. On a further Monitoring function tab, it is possible to set the type of the monitoring object (1 bit or 1 byte) and the type of telegram at the start of detection dependent on the intensity and cyclical sending behaviour. The parameter Threshold indicates the level of sensitivity. The value 1 means maximum sensitivity while the value 255 means minimum sensitivity. It can also be parameterised at which point the detector is in monitoring mode after activation. This period is composed of a base and factor in a similar way to the cyclical time. It is also possible to activate a photoelectric sensor function. The general parameter Photo-electric sensor must be set to yes. On a further parameter page Photoelectric sensor, the type of the object can be set (1 bit or 1 byte) together with the value that is sent when the lower or upper threshold is reached as well as the cyclical sending behaviour. With the parameter Ignore artificial light, it is determined whether the movement detector only reacts to daylight or not. The parameters Lower threshold or Upper threshold indicate when the telegrams should be sent by the photelectric sensor. The value 0 means dark while 255 means maximum brightness. If the photo-electric sensor function is to enabled externally, this can be carried out with the communication object Photo-electric sensor / Activation. The parameter Activation object photoelectric sensor must previously be set to available. If the monitoring function should be enabled externally, this can be carried out with the communication object Signal Activation. To do so, the parameter Activation object monitoring must previously be set to available. Pull off detection Pull off detection represents a further security function. If the movement detector is removed from the bus/mains coupler, it sends a 0 via its communication object Pull off detection / Telegr. switch. It is therefore possible to detect any possible tampering by thieves. Photo-electric sensor
May 2007
2 - 5
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

No. 0 1 Type 1 bit 1 bit Object name Pull off detection Movement Function Telegr. switch Telegr. switch
Communication objects with sending of value telegrams
No. 0 1
Type 1 bit 1 byte
Object name Pull off detection Movement
Function Telegr. switch Telegr. value
Communication objects with activation object and brightnessdependent switching activation object
No. 2 3
Type 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Movement Brightness dependent switching
Function Activation Activation
Communication objects with monitoring, photo-electric sensor and activation objects
No. 5 6 10 11
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Signal Signal Photo-electric sensor Photo-electric sensor
Function Telegr. switch Activation Telegr. switch Activation
Communication objects with monitoring and photo-electric sensor values and activation objects
No. 5 6 10 11
Type 1 byte 1 bit 1 byte 1 bit
Function Telegr. value Activation Telegr. value Activation
2 - 6
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Movement detector parameters with low access: Activation object movement not available available only if available is selected: Enabling movement at ON telegram OFF telegram At disabling the movement do not send a telegram send ON telegram once send OFF telegram once At enabling the movement do not send a telegram send ON telegram once send OFF telegram once Type of movement object Switching (EIS 1) Sending at detection ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Telegram after recovery time ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor for cyclic sending 100 Additional parameters for high access: General: Monitoring function yes no only if yes is selected: Monitoring function: Activation object monitoring not available available only if available is selected: Enabling monitoring function at ON telegram OFF telegram Type of monitoring object Switching (EIS 1) Value (EIS 6) only if Switching (EIS 1) is selected: Sending at the beginning of ON telegram detection OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Sending at the end of detection ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor for cyclic sending 100 only if Value (EIS 6) is selected: Sending at the beginning of 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / detection no telegram Sending at the end of detection 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram No alarm sends 0 Threshold 4 (1: sensitive / 255: insensitive) Time base till watch dog is in 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / monitoring function 9 min Time factor till watch dog is in 35 monitoring function
Parameters for Low Access The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
Parameters for High Access The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
May 2007
2 - 7
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Photo-electric sensor only if yes is selected: Photo-electric sensor: Activation object photo-electric sensor only if available is selected: Enabling threshold sensor at Ignore artificial light Type of threshold object only if Switching (EIS 1) is selected: Sending at upper threshold yes no
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram yes no Switching (EIS 1) Value (EIS 6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 10 200
Sending at lower threshold
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclic sending only if Value (EIS 6) is selected: Sending at upper threshold Sending at lower threshold Lower threshold: (0: dark / 255: bright) Upper threshold (0: dark / 255: bright) Behaviour at bus recovery: (communication objects) Brightness dependent switching Movement Movement detector: Activation object brightness dependent switching Type of movement object only if Switching (EIS1) is selected: Sending at detection
enabled disabled enabled disabled not available available Switching (EIS 1) Value (EIS 6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram
Telegram after recovery time
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclic sending only if Value (EIS 6) is selected: Sending at detection Telegram after recovery time
2 - 8
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Adjustments: Threshold of light sensor is adjustable with only if ETS is selected: Threshold (0: dark / 255: bright) Recovery time adjustable with only if ETS is selected: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time Time factor of recovery time
Parameters for High Access The default settings for the values is printed in bold type
Potentiometer ETS 100 Potentiometer ETS
0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
May 2007
2 - 9
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

The application program is intended for the movement detector combined with the flush-mounted switch actuator/ sensor. Using this application program, the movement detector can pick up movement in its detection range and send switching or value telegrams. When assigning parameters, it should be noted that some parameters are only visible when High Access is selected and can only be modified at this point. The setting of the threshold for the light sensor as well as the recovery time can be carried out using the potentiometer at the back of the movement detector. There is also a separate setting aid. Alternatively, the settings can be carried out in ETS. To do this, the parameter settings should be changed from Potentiometer to ETS. With the parameter Threshold, it is possible to indicate which brightness value triggers the movement detector. The value 0 means dark while 255 means maximum brightness. The recovery time can be set with the two parameters Time base of recovery time and Time factor of recovery time. The base and factor are multiplied to produce the recovery time: Recovery time = Base * Factor The operating mode of the movement detector can be set via the slide switch. If the slide switch is moved into position 1, the movement detector sends a 1 to its communication object Movement / Telegr. switch. If it is moved into position 0, it sends a 0. The modified operating mode is thus transferred on the bus. In both cases, the monitoring function is inactive. The current status of the slide switch is sent on the bus via the object Movement / Activation. It is therefore guaranteed that other movement detectors assume the operating mode simultaneously. Switch The movement detector sends switching telegrams to the communication object Movement / Telegr. switch when it picks up some movement in its detection range. The value of the switching telegram can be set with the parameter Sending at detection. It is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. If the movement detector senses no further movement once the recovery time has elapsed, it is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically in this case. This is determined with the parameter Telegram after recovery time. It is also possible to disable the movement detector. The communication object Movement / Activation is used for this. It is visibly switched with the parameter Activation object movement. The movement detector is activated or deactivated if a telegram is received at this object. With the parameter At ... movement, it can be set whether an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram is sent once via the communication object Movement / Telegr. switch. Example: In a functional building, all the movement detectors are enabled in the morning at a specific time. To do this, a 1 is sent with a time switch to the control centre and received at the communication object Movement / Activation. In this example, the parameter Enabling movement at is set to ON telegram. Value It is also possible to send values when movement is detected. To do this, the parameter Type of movement object must be changed to Value (EIS 6). Dimming actuators can for example be dimmed to a value that is smaller than the maximum value. The parameter settings Sending at the beginning/end of the detection determine the size of the value that is sent. The option no telegram can also be selected.
Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring Threshold /2
1 lx, PIR
Selection in ETS ABB Phys. Sensors Movement for 1 SA
2 - 10
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Cyclic All switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically. It should be ensured that the setting ON telegram cyclically or OFF telegram cyclically is selected in the respective parameter. The total cyclic time can be set with the parameters Time base for cyclical sending and Time factor for cyclic sending. The cyclic sending interval for a telegram is calculated by combining the base and factor: Cyclic time = Base * Factor Monitoring Note: The Monitoring function does not serve to create a VdS certified alarm system. It offers the possibility to use the EIB/ KNX-system to control rooms. It is not an alternative for an alarm system. It is possible to activate a monitoring function. To do so, the general parameter Monitoring function must be set to yes. The monitoring function is not triggered at the slightest thermal movement but only if a strong energy source is registered during a short interval or several weak sources over a longer period. If the monitoring function is activated, a further communication object Signal Telegr. switch is available. The presence detector records the number and intensity of movements within a time period and only sends telegrams once a specific sensitivity level has been exceeded. On a further Monitoring function tab, it is possible to set the type of the monitoring object (1 bit or 1 byte) and the type of telegram at the start of detection dependent on the intensity and cyclical sending behaviour. The parameter Threshold indicates the level of sensitivity. The value 1 means maximum sensitivity while the value 255 means minimum sensitivity. It can also be parameterised at which point the detector is in monitoring mode after activation. This period is composed of a base and factor in a similar way to the cyclical time. If the monitoring function should be enabled externally, this can be carried out with the communication object Signal Activation. To do so, the parameter Activation object monitoring must previously be set to available. Pull off detection Pull off detection represents a further security function. If the movement detector is removed from the bus/mains coupler, it sends a 0 via its communication object Pull off detection / Telegr. switch. It is therefore possible to detect any possible tampering by thieves. Photo-electric sensor It is also possible to activate a photoelectric sensor function. The general parameter Photo-electric sensor must be set to yes. On a further parameter page Photoelectric sensor, the type of the object can be set (1 bit or 1 byte) together with the value that is sent when the lower or upper threshold is reached as well as the cyclical sending behaviour. With the parameter Ignore artificial light, it is determined whether the movement detector only reacts to daylight or not. The parameters Lower threshold or Upper threshold indicate when the telegrams should be sent by the photoelectric sensor. The value 0 means dark while 255 means maximum brightness. If the photo-electric sensor function is to be enabled externally, this can be carried out with the communication object Photo-electric sensor / Activation. The parameter Activation object photo-electric sensor must previously be set to available.
May 2007
2 - 11
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Relay The relay can be selected as a normally open contact or normally closed contact for various applications. The relay output has its own communication object available Output / Switch. The relay output can thus be switched via the EIB independently of the movement detector. If the relay is to be controlled by the movement detector, the communication objects Movement / Telegr. switch and Output / Switch must be linked with a common group address. In normal mode, the relay output can also be assigned switch ON and switch OFF delays. These delays are calculated by combining a base and factor. In the staircase lighting mode, there is a switch ON delay available as in normal mode. The period of the staircase lighting function is assigned via a base and factor. The actuator can send its status on the EIB. To do so, the parameter Status response must be set to yes. In this case the communication object Output / Status is available. If the value 1 is sent, this means that the relay has pikked up.
Communication objects with activation object
No. 0 1 2 7
Object name Pull off detection Movement Movement Output
Function Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Activation Switch
Communication objects with sending of value telegrams and status response
No. 0 1 7 8
Type 1 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Pull off detection Movement Output Output
Function Telegr. switch Telegr. value Switch Status
Communication objects with brightness-dependent switching activation object
No. 3
Type 1 bit
Object name Brightness dependent switching
Function Activation
Communication objects with monitoring, photo-electric sensor and activation objects
No. 5 6 10 11
Communication objects with monitoring and photo-electric sensor values and activation objects
No. 5 6 10 11
Function Telegr. value Activation Telegr. value Activation
2 - 12
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Movement detector parameters with low access: Contact on bus voltage recovery ON OFF Movement detector: Activation object movement not available available only if available is selected: Enabling movement at ON telegram OFF telegram At disabling the movement do not send a telegram send ON telegram once send OFF telegram once At enabling the movement do not send a telegram send ON telegram once send OFF telegram once Type of movement object Switching (EIS1) Sending at detection ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Telegram after recovery time ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor for cyclic sending 100 Output: Operating mode Normal operation Staircase lighting function Switch ON delay yes no only if yes is selected: Time base for switch ON delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Factor for switch ON delay 10 (1 255) only for normal operation: Switch OFF delay yes no only if yes is selected: Time base for switch OFF delay 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Factor for switch OFF delay 10 (1 255) only for staircase lighting function: Time base for staircase lighting 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / function 9 min Factor for staircase lighting function 10 (1 255) Status response yes no Relay is normally open contact normally closed contact
Parameters for Low Access The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
May 2007
2 - 13
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Additional parameters for high access: General: Monitoring function only if yes is selected: Monitoring function: Activation object monitoring only if available is selected: Enabling monitoring function at Type of monitoring object only if Switching (EIS 1) is selected: Sending at the beginning of detection
yes no
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram Switching (EIS 1) Value (EIS 6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 0 4 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 150 yes no
Sending at the end of detection
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclic sending only if Value (EIS 6) is selected: Sending at the beginning of detection Sending at the end of detection No alarm sends Threshold (1: sensitive / 255: insensitive) Time base till watch dog is in monitoring function Time base till watch dog is in monitoring function Photo-electric sensor only if yes is selected: Photo-electric sensor: Activation object photo-electric sensor only if available is selected: Enabling threshold sensor at Ignore artificial light Type of threshold object only if Switching (EIS 1) is selected: Sending at upper threshold
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram yes / no Switching (EIS 1) Value (EIS 6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
Sending at lower threshold
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclic sending
2 - 14
May 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

only if Value (EIS 6) is selected: Sending at upper threshold Sending at lower threshold Lower threshold: (0: dark / 255: bright) Upper threshold (0: dark / 255: bright) Behaviour at bus recovery: (communication objects) Brightness dependent switching Movement Contact on bus voltage recovery Movement detector: Activation object brightness dependent switching Type of movement object only if Switching (EIS 1) is selected: Sending at detection
100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 200
enabled disabled enabled disabled ON OFF not available available Switching (EIS 1) Value (EIS 6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 s / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram Potentiometer ETS 100 Potentiometer ETS
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclic sending only if Value (EIS 6) is selected: Sending at detection Telegram after recovery time Adjustments: Threshold of light sensor is adjustable with only if ETS is selected: Threshold (0: dark / 255: bright) Recovery time adjustable with only if ETS is selected: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time Time factor of recovery time
0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
May 2007
2 - 15
ABB i-bus EIB
4-fold multifunction switch sensor solo, FM Type: 6127MF-xx

The application module 4-fold switch sensor solo is placed on a flush-mounted bus coupler, switch actuator or switch/dimming actuator. The 4-fold switch sensor solo can send e.g. switching, dimming or shutter control telegrams to EIB actuators. Additional the sensor can be used for storage and/or send out of lightscenes. The switch sensor has two contacts under the rocker and a light-emitting diode which can light up red or green. In addition, a cover frame in the chosen colour in either the Solo or future design is required together with a flush-mounted bus coupler and a bus connecting terminal.
Technical Data Power supply Operating and display elements Connections EIB 24 V DC, via the bus line 4 rocker, each with 2 push button contacts 4 x two-colour LED red / green Bus coupler FM (6120 U-102-500) 10-pole plug connector Switch actuator FM (6110 U-101-500) Switch/dimming actuator FM (6114 U-500) IP 20, EN 60 529, placed on a flush-mounted insert Operation - 5 C 45 C Storage - 25 C 55 C Transport - 25 C 70 C solo future savanna / ivory savanna / ivory davos / studio white davos / studio white manhatten / graphite manhatten / graphite samoa / light green stone / light grey toscana / crimson red attica / blue-grey latched onto flush-mounted insert 63 x 63 mm (H x W) 0.04 kg EIB-certified in accordance with the EMC guideline and the low voltage guideline
Type of protection Ambient temperature range Design Colour
Mounting Dimensions Weight Certification CE norm
2 - 2
0073-1-7040 March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

Anzahl Kommunikationsobjekte max. Anzahl Gruppenadressen max. Anzahl Zuordnungen
Anwendungsprogramme For Bus coupler FM, Switch actuator/sensor FM and Switch/dimming actuator FM: Switch sensor 4f MF TP/1
22
22
22
Operation with the various flush-mounted devices is defined on the General parameter page. If the switch sensor has been placed onto a flush-mounted switch actuator or switch/dimming actuator, it is not necessary to insert a further device from the database in ETS2.
Circuit diagram
1 Bus cable 2 Bus terminal 3 Bus coupler FM
4 Application module 5 10-pole plug
March 2003
2 - 3
ABB i-bus EIB

The 4-fold multifunction switch sensor Solo can be placed on a flushmounted bus coupler, switch actuator or a switch/dimming actuator. The respective flush-mounted device on which the switch sensor Solo has been placed, must be set first of all on the parameter page BCU type. Only then are the parameters for the various flush-mounted actuators enabled in the ETS2 program. The following section describes the functions of the rocker. These functions are always identical, regardless of the flush-mounted device that is used. Switch sensor If the operation mode of the rocker is defined as Switch sensor, the switch sensor sends ON or OFF telegrams via the relevant 1 bit object Rocker Switch. In the default setting, the switch sensor sends TOGGLE telegrams when the right or left rocker is pressed. This means that an ON command is sent first followed by an OFF command after a push button action and then an ON command if the rocker is pressed again. Via the parameter Working mode of rocker, the rockers can also be set so that the right rocker sends ON commands and the left rocker sends OFF commands or vice versa. Dimming sensor In the operation mode Dimming sensor, an ON or OFF command is sent to the 1 bit communication object Rocker - Switch when one of the rockers is pressed briefly. If the rocker is pressed for a longer period, the switch sensor sends commands for dimming brighter or darker to the 4 bit object Rocker - Dimming. If the rocker is released after a long push button action, the switch sensor sends the command Stop dimming. In the default setting, the switch sensor sends TOGGLE telegrams after a short operation of the right or left rocker. A long operation of the left rocker dims down the brightness level while a long operation of the right rocker dims up the brightness level. The setting Working mode of rocker defines whether the shutter is raised or lowered after operation of the right or left rocker. Flexible assignment With the application Flexible assignment, the right and the left side of the rocker of the switch sensor each have their own 1 bit communication object Rocker - Switch available. It is possible to send ON, OFF or TOGGLE telegrams on the EIB via this object. Each pulse edge of the rockers can therefore be set individually. The switch sensor can thus be adapted to a wide variety of applications. If e.g. inching mode should be implemented, the setting rising = ON, falling = OFF should be selected. With the parameter setting no reaction, it is possible to completely deactivate a rocker. LED The relevant LED of the rocker can display the current status of the object Rocker ... or serve as an orientation light. If the LED is used for status display, the colour changes when the object value changes. It can freely selected whether the LED lights up green or red in the OFF state or red or green in the ON state. The LED can light up green or red as an orientation light. This behaviour is adapted if required via the parameter Working mode of rocker. Shutter sensor In the operation mode Shutter sensor, the switch sensor has the 1 bit communication objects Move shutter and Adjust shutter. After a long operation of the rocker, the switch sensor sends telegrams to the connected shutter actuators to raise or lower the shutter. After a short operation, it sends telegrams to stop the shutter movement or for louvre adjustment.
Switch sensor 4f MF TP/1
Selection in ETS2 ABB Push button solo Push button, 4-fold
2 - 4
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

On the parameter page Status LED, it is possible to enable a further 1 bit communication object Status LED Switch. It is now possible to activate or deactivate the status LEDs via this object with an ON command. This means that the LED changes colour or serves as an orientation light only if the object Status LED - Switch has the value 1 (a 0), as defined in the rocker settings. Example: In a bedroom (hotel room), the occupant could be disturbed during the night by the status LEDs of the switch sensor Solo. The function of the status LEDs can be deactivated from 22:00 onwards via the object Status LED - Switch by means of a time switch. Lightscene sensor In the operation mode Lightscene sensor, the switch sensor sends a 1 byte value via the relevant object Rocker ... - Lightscene number. This value is assigned to a specific lightscene. 8 different lightscenes per 4-fold switch sensor can be stored and retrieved. If two lightscenes are stored in the switch sensor, it is possible to recall the lightscene via a 1 bit object. Switch sensors without multifunctions can thus be integrated into lightscene control. The toggling of the bit size is carried out via the setting Lightscene retrieval. Two different lightscenes per rocker can be stored and recalled. The parameter setting Recall lightscene number for left push button and Recall lightscene number for right push button specifies which lightscene is recalled by the respective push button. If the common group address is linked with a Lightscene number object of a rocker of another 4-fold multifunction switch sensor, two lightscenes can also be retrieved by this rocker. A prerequisite is that the application Lightscene sensor has been set for this rocker as well as the correct lightscene number. It is important that the lightscene numbers that have been set for a rocker are also set on the Lightscene parameter page as this is the only way that the lightscene number that is sent by the rocker can recall the corresponding lightscene in the switch sensor. The lightscene is saved via a long push button action, provided that the parameter Store lightscenes via long push button action has been set accordingly. All the actuators are dimmed or switched to the required brightness value before saving the scene. A long operation (approx. 4 s) takes place of the left or right push button of the rocker which should recall the corresponding lightscene. Note: To save the lightscenes, the read flag (R flag) must be set in the corresponding communication objects of the actuators. The status LED of the corresponding rocker flashes while the lightscene is being saved. If the lightscene storage should be carried out in the switch sensor Solo, the parameter Lightscenes stored in the device should be activated. The parameter Lightscene number for lightscene ... defines which lightscenes can be saved by the switch sensor. A maximum of 8 lightscenes per EIB-Solo multifunction switch sensor can be stored. The number of lightscenes is specified with the setting Number of lightscenes. If more lightscenes are required, a further EIBSolo multifunction switch sensor must be used. If an additional switch sensor is used, the parameters Lightscene number must be changed accordingly so that the same lightscenes are not used twice. The Lightscene number object of the rocker (e.g. object no. 14) is linked with Lightscene - Number object no. 8 via a common group address. If the group address of the Lightscene - Number object (no. 8) is received, it sends telegrams to switch or dimming actuators via the objects Actuator group A to Actuator group E. The actuator groups can be set as 1 bit or 1 byte.
March 2003
2 - 5
ABB i-bus EIB

The preselection of the lightscene values is carried out on the Lightscene ... parameter page. This can be OFF/UP or ON/DOWN for 1 bit values. In the case of 1 byte values, it can be set between 0% and 100% in steps of 10%. Switch sensor value The operation mode Switch sensor value causes the switch sensor to send 1 byte value telegrams via the relevant object Rocker - Value. By default, the value 1 is sent when the left rocker is pressed while the value 0 is sent when the right rocker is pressed. The values that should be sent can be defined via the parameters Left push button sends value and Right push button sends value. These values can range between 0 and 255. It is thus possible e.g. to switch on a dimming actuator with a specific brightness value or if it is already switched on, to change the brightness level to a specific value. LED (for switch sensor value) In the operation mode Switch sensor value, the status LED of the respective rocker displays the current status of the value object. If a telegram with a value > 1 is sent or received, the LED lights up red. If a telegram with the value 0 is received, it lights up green. This behaviour can be inverted via the parameter Colour of the LED. Alternatively, the LED can also serve as an orientation light. To do so, the parameter Colour of the LED must be set accordingly. Actuator functions The following section describes the actuator functions of the flush-mounted switch actuator and the switch/ dimming actuator. Switch actuator FM (6110 U-101-500) The switch actuator has a 1 bit communication object Output Switch which is used to switch the relay. In the default setting, the output switches on following the receipt of a telegram with the value 1 and switches off after a telegram with the value 0. If the parameter Behaviour of contact is set to normally closed contact, the relay is closed following the receipt of a telegram with the value 0 and opened after a telegram with the value 1. The relay contact is opened on bus voltage failure. The behaviour of the relay contact on mains voltage recovery can be set. By default, the relay is opened. Further options are closed or restore previous state. If the output should carry out defined switching on/off, the actuator takes into account the parameter Switching behaviour. Logic (Switch actuator FM, 6110 U-101-500) With the parameter Logic operation, it is possible to set an AND or an OR function. In both cases, the ETS2 program displays a further 1 bit communication object Output - ... function for the output. The output links the values of communication objects no. 0 and no. 1 and switches the relay according to the result. A corresponding parameter is available for preselecting a defined input signal on bus voltage recovery. Status (Switch actuator FM, 6110 U-101-500) If the parameter Status response is set to yes, the ETS2 program displays a further 1 bit communication object Output - Status response. This communication object sends a telegram each time the actuator is switched. The value 1 means that the relay has adopted the active state in accordance with the parameter Behaviour of contact. Staircase lighting function (Switch actuator FM, 6110 U-101-500) In the operation mode Staircase lighting function, the output is switched on immediately following the receipt of an
2 - 6
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

ON telegram. Once the period that was set in the time base and factor parameters has elapsed, the relay is automatically opened. If the output receives further ON telegrams before the period has elapsed, the time restarts. If the staircase lighting function and the logic operation are activated, the time setting only has an effect if the actuator is switched via object no. 0 Output Switch. In addition to the staircase lighting function, it is also possible to activate an ON delay. The corresponding parameter must be activated. The ON delay is again defined with a time base and factor. Timing function (Switch actuator FM, 6110 U-101-500) With the operation mode Timing function, it is possible to activate an ON and/or OFF delay. The two periods can be of varying lengths and are defined with a time base and factor. The delay periods only influence the switch object. If e.g. an OR function has been selected in addition to an ON delay, the time delay is only active if an ON command is received via the switch object. If the ON command is however sent directly to the logic object, the actuator switches directly to the state that was preselected in the parameter Behaviour of contact. Switch/Dimming actuator FM (6114 U-500) The output of the switch/dimming actuator FM can be switched on and off via the 1 bit communication object no. 0 Output - Switch. The same communication object also sends a telegram if the output changes its state because e.g. the 4 bit object no. 1 Dimmer - Rel. dimming or the 1 byte object no. 2 Dimmer - Brightness value has received a telegram. If the output objects of several dimming actuators/sensors use the same group addresses, the parameter Mode for parallel operation ..... must be taken into account. Only one device may then be set to master. The other devices must use the setting slave. If this is not observed, the devices may send telegrams continually to each other. The brightness value which the flushmounted switch/dimming actuator uses when switching on, is defined in the parameters. Either a constant value between 10 % brightness and 100 % brightness can be selected or the actuator stores the value of the object Brightness value at the point when it was switched off via the switch object. When the device is switched on again, the value is restored. Dimming (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) With the 4 bit communication object Dimmer - Rel. dimming, the connected luminaire can be dimmed in accordance with EIS 2. If the actuator is switched off, it can be dimmed on via the 4 bit object. The period for passing through the dimming range can be defined with the two parameters Time base and Factor .... The actuator uses the formula Total time = Base * Factor. With the 1 byte communication object no. 2 Dimmer - Brightness value, the luminaire can be preassigned one of 256 brightness values which range from 0 = switched off to 255 = full brightness. Via the parameter Behaviour on change in the brightness value, it is defined whether the new value should be set immediately (jump to value) or at the selected dimming rate (dim to value). Status (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) If the parameter Status response is set to yes, the ETS2 software displays a further 1 bit object Status response. As soon as the switch/ dimming actuator is switched on, a telegram with the value 1 is sent, regardless of the brightness value. If the actuator is switched off again, a 0 is sent.
March 2003
2 - 7
ABB i-bus EIB

Logic (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) With the parameter Logic operation, it is possible to set an AND or an OR function. In both cases, the ETS2 program displays a further 1 bit communication object for the output. The actuator links the values of communication object no. 0 Output Switch and no. 3 Output - ... function and then switches the output. In this case, the parameter Status response also enables precise monitoring of the actual output state. Staircase lighting function (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) In the operation mode Staircase lighting function, the output is switched on immediately following the receipt of an ON telegram. Once the period that was set in the time base and factor parameters has elapsed, the relay is automatically opened. If the output receives further ON telegrams before the period has elapsed, the time restarts. In the case of the flushmounted switch/dimming actuator, it is also possible to integrate an extension of the staircase lighting function. If the staircase lighting function and the logic operation are activated, the time setting only has an effect if the actuator is switched via object no. 0 Output Switch. In addition to the staircase lighting function, it is also possible to activate an ON delay. The corresponding parameter must be activated. The ON delay is again defined with a time base and factor. Timing function (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) With the operation mode Timing function, it is possible to activate an ON and/or OFF delay. The two periods can be of varying lengths and are defined with a time base and factor. If e.g. an OR function has been selected in addition to an ON delay, the time delay is only active if an ON command is received via the switch object. If the ON command is however sent directly to the logic object, the actuator switches directly to the state that was preselected in the parameter Behaviour of contact. Read-only memory (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) The actuator has an additional 1 bit communication object Read-only memory .... Two values can therefore be set using the possible object values 0 and 1. The parameters Value for read-only memory ... are used for this purpose. The number of read-only memory devices that are actually used is defined with the parameters Number of objects and Behaviour on receipt of an OFF telegram. Bus voltage failure/recovery (Switch/dimming actuator FM, 6114 U-500) On bus voltage failure, the flushmounted switch/dimming actuator switches off the connected luminares. On bus voltage recovery, the luminaires normally remain switched off. It is however also possible to set the minimum or maximum brightness or the last stored brightness value before the voltage failure.
2 - 8
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

No. 14 16 18 20 Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit Object name Rocker 1 Rocker 2 Rocker 3 Rocker 4 Function Switch Switch Switch Switch
Communication objects when used as a switch sensor
Communication objects when used as a dimming sensor
No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Type 1 bit 4 bit 1 bit 4 bit 1 bit 4 bit 1 bit 4 bit
Object name Rocker 1, short Rocker 1, long Rocker 2, short Rocker 2, long Rocker 3, short Rocker 3, long Rocker 4, short Rocker 4, long
Function Switch Dimming Switch Dimming Switch Dimming Switch Dimming
Communication objects when used as a shutter sensor
No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Object name Rocker 1, long Rocker 1, short Rocker 2, long Rocker 2, short Rocker 3, long Rocker 3, short Rocker 4, long Rocker 4, short
Function Move shutter Adjust shutter Move shutter Adjust shutter Move shutter Adjust shutter Move shutter Adjust shutter
Communication objects with flexible assignment of the rockers
No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Object name Rocker 1, right Rocker 1, left Rocker 2, right Rocker 2, left Rocker 3, right Rocker 3, left Rocker 4, right Rocker 4, left
Function Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch
Communication objects when used as a lightscene push button
No. 14 16 18 20
Object name Rocker 1 Rocker 2 Rocker 3 Rocker 4
Function Lightscene Lightscene Lightscene Lightscene
number number number number
Communication objects when used as a switch sensor value
No. 14 16 18 20
Type 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Object name Rocker 1 Rocker 2 Rocker 3 Rocker 4
Function Value Value Value Value
Communication objects when used with flush-mounted switch sensor, AND function and status response
No. 1 2 3
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Output Output Output
Function Switch AND function Status response
March 2003
2 - 9
ABB i-bus EIB

No. 1 2 3 Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit Object name Output Output Output Function Switch OR function Status response
Communication objects when used with flush-mounted switch actuator, OR function and status response
Communication objects when used with flush-mounted dimming actuator, logic operation, status response and preset objects
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Type 1 bit 4 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Output Dimmer Dimmer Output Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer
Function Switch Rel. dimming Brightness value function Status response Preset Preset
Communication objects with switch object for status LED
No. 0
Type 1 bit
Object name Status LED
Function Switch
Communication objects with sending of lightscenes (1 bit actuator group)
No. 8 9 10 11 12 13
Type 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Lightscenes Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Telegr. switch Telegr. switch
Function Number Actuator Actuator Actuator Actuator Actuator
group group group group group
A B C D E
Communication objects with sending of lightscenes (1 byte actuator group)
No. 8 9 10 11 12 13
Type 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Object name Lightscenes Telegr. brightness Telegr. brightness Telegr. brightness Telegr. brightness Telegr. brightness
Function Number Actuator Actuator Actuator Actuator Actuator
value value value value value
group group group group group
A B C D E
2 - 10
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

BCU type: Bus coupler / flush-mounted actuator
Flush-mounted bus coupler (6120 U-102) Flush-mounted switch actuator (6110 U-101) Flush-mounted dimming actuator (6114 U)
Parameters of rocker 1: Operation mode of rocker
Switch sensor Dimming sensor Shutter sensor Flexible assignment Lightscene sensor Switch sensor value
Parameters when used as a switch sensor. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
Only for switch sensor: Working mode of rocker
Operation mode of LED Only if the value is displayed: Colour of the LED Only if orientation light is selected: Colour of the LED
TOGGLE left = OFF, right = ON left = ON, right = OFF indicates value of object Rocker orientation light OFF = green, ON = red OFF = red, ON = green always green always red
Parameters when used as a dimming sensor. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
Only for dimming sensor: Working mode of rocker
Operation mode of LED
left = darker/TOGGLE, right = brighter TOGGLE links = brighter/TOGGLE, right = darker/TOGGLE left = darker/OFF, right = brighter/ON left = brighter/ON, right = darker/OFF indicates value of object Rocker, short orientation light OFF = green, ON = red OFF = red, ON = green always green always red
Only if the value is displayed: Colour of the LED Only if orientation light is selected: Colour of the LED
Parameters when used as a shutter sensor. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
Only for shutter sensor: Working mode of rocker Operation mode of LED Only if the value is displayed: Colour of the LED Only if orientation light is selected: Colour of the LED
left = UP, right = DOWN left = DOWN, right = UP indicates value of object Rocker, long orientation light UP = green, DOWN = red UP = red, DOWN = green always green always red
March 2003
2 - 11
ABB i-bus EIB

Only for flexible assignment: Reaction on right rocker Only for defined switching: Switch function of right rocker
Parameters for flexible assignment. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
TOGGLE defined switching no reaction rising = OFF falling = OFF rising = OFF, falling = OFF rising = ON falling = OFF rising = ON, falling = OFF rising = OFF, falling = ON rising = ON, falling = ON TOGGLE defined switching no reaction rising = OFF falling = OFF rising = OFF, falling = OFF rising = ON falling = OFF rising = ON, falling = OFF rising = OFF, falling = ON rising = ON, falling = ON indicates value of object Rocker, left orientation light UP = green, DOWN = red UP = red, DOWN = green always green always red
Reaction on left rocker Only for defined switching: Switch function of left rocker
Operation mode of rocker
Only if the value is displayed: Colour of the LED Only if orientation light is selected: Colour of the LED
Parameters when used as a lightscene sensor. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
Only for lightscene sensor: Recall lightscene number for right push button Recall lightscene number for left push button Store lightscenes via long push button action Lightscenes stored in the device Only if yes is selected: Number of lightscenes Only if 2 lightscenes are selected: Lightscene retrieval Lightscene number for lightscene 1+2 Separate for all lightscenes: Lightscene number for lightscene Separate for all actuator groups: Type of actuator group Separate for each lightscene: Only for 1 bit actuator groups: Preset option for actuator group Only for 1 byte actuator groups: Preset option for actuator group
1 / 2 / 3 / / 32 1 / 2 / 3 / / 32 not possible possible no yes 2/4/6/8 132 with saving (1 byte) OFF=1,ON=2, without saving (1 bit) 1+2
1+2 / 3+4 / 5+6 / 7+8 / / 31+32
Switch or shutter actuator (1 bit) Dimming actuator (8 bit)
OFF / UP ON / DOWN OFF / 10 % / / 40 % / / 100 %
2 - 12
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

Only for switch sensor value: Left push button sends value Right push button sends value Operation mode of LED Only if the value is displayed: Colour of the LED Only if orientation light is selected: Colour of the LED
Parameters for switch sensor value. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
1 0 indicates value of object Rocker orientation light 0=green, >0=red 0=red, >0=green always green always red OFF
Parameters for the status LED. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type.
Status LED Status LED Only if switched: Status LED Behaviour of status LED on bus voltage recovery
indicates object value switched if ON, status LED = OFF if ON, status LED = ON ON OFF
March 2003
2 - 13
ABB i-bus EIB

Additional parameters when used with switch actuator FM (6110 U-101): Switch actuator - General: Behaviour of contact normally open contact normally closed contact Contact on mains voltage recovery opened closed restore previous state
Switch actuator - Operation modes: Operation mode
Normal operation Staircase lighting function Timing function no yes approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10 approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10
Only for staircase lighting function: ON delay Only if yes is selected: Time base for ON delay Factor for ON delay (2127) Time base for staircase lighting function Factor for staircase lighting function (2127) Only for timing function: ON delay Only if yes is selected: Time base for ON delay Factor for ON delay (2127) OFF delay Only if yes is selected: Time base for OFF delay Factor for OFF delay (2127) Logic operation
no yes approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10 no yes approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10 no logic operation AND function OR function OFF 0 ON 1 no yes
Only if a logic operation is selected: Value of logic operation on mains voltage recovery Status response
2 - 14
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB

Additional parameters when used with dimming actuator FM (6114 U): Dimming actuator - General: Behaviour on change in the jump to value brightness value dim to value Brightness value for ON telegram final value parameterised value Only for parameterised value: Initial brightness value OFF / 10 % / / 90 % / 100 % Brightness value on mains voltage 10 % brightness recovery 100 % brightness final value OFF Mode for parallel operation of several master flush-mounted dimming actuators slave
Dimming actuator - Operation modes: Operation mode
Normal operation Staircase lighting function Timing function no yes approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10 approx. 130 ms / / approx. 4.2 s / / approx. 1.2 h 43 no yes no yes approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10 no yes approx. 130 ms / / approx. 520 ms / / approx. 1.2 h 10 no logic operation AND function OR function no yes
Only for staircase lighting function: ON delay Only for ON delay: Time base for ON delay Factor for ON delay (2127) Time base for staircase lighting function Factor for staircase lighting function (2127) Enable time extension Only if yes is selected: ON delay Only if yes is selected: Time base for ON delay Factor for ON delay (2127) OFF delay Only if yes is selected: Time base for OFF delay Factor for OFF delay (2127) Logic operation
Status response
March 2003
2 - 15
ABB i-bus EIB

Dimming rate: Time base for passing through the dimming range
Factor for passing through the dimming range Note: Time base * Factor * 255
approx. 0.5 ms approx. 8.0 ms approx. 130 ms approx. 2.1 s approx. 33 s 20
Read-only memory: Number of objects Only if 1 is selected: Behaviour on receipt of an ON telegram Brightness value for read-only memory (object no. 5 = ON) Behaviour on receipt of an OFF telegram Only for preselected brightness value: Brightness value for read-only memory (object no. 5 = OFF)
none 1 set preselected brightness value OFF / 10 % / / 30 % / / 100 % no reaction set preselected brightness value OFF / 10 % / 20 % / / 100 %
2 - 16
March 2003
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX
Busch-Watchdog Presence EIB Type: 6131-74-102-500

Contents
Technical data Application programs (List) Circuit diagrams in combination with Bus coupler FM (6120-102): Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /3 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /3 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /3 Switch Dim Cyclic HVAC Monitg. Constant light /4 in combination with Switch actuator/sensor FM (6110 U-101-500): Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /4 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /4 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /4 In combination with Switch/dimming actuator FM (6114 U-500): Switch Dim Cycl. HVAC Monitg. Constant light /3 2-2 2-3 2-3
2-4 2 - 10 2 - 17 2 - 25
2 - 29 2 - 31 2 - 33
2 - 35
April 2007
2 - 1
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX
Busch-Watchdog Presence EIB Type: 6131-xxx-102-500

The Busch-Watchdog Presence is clipped onto a flush-mounted bus coupler, switch actuator/sensor or switch/dimming actuator. The presence detector is used for switching and/or constant lighting control of lighting installations and/or HVAC systems. The sensor can switch a heating, ventilation or air conditioning controller on or off without dependence on the lighting control. Constant lighting control can also be implemented via additional objects. In addition to movement detection, the sensor can detect movement within a certain period with the help of its integrated monitoring function. It is therefore possible to integrate the sensor in detector systems. The recovery time and the sensitivity of the built-in twilight switch can be set with the three potentiometers on the rear of the presence detector or via the parameters in ETS. The area of detection can be adapted to the ambient conditions with the help of the foil supplied or via ETS.
Technical data Power supply Operating and display elements EIB 24 V DC, via the bus line 3 potentiometers Potentiometer Lux1 Twilight sensor 5 1000 lx Potentiometer Time Light Recovery time 10 s 32 min Potentiometer Time HVAC Recovery time 1 min 60 min Bus coupler FM 10-pole plug connector Switch actuator/sensor FM Switch/dimming actuator FM IP 20, EN 60 529 mounted on the bus coupler Operation - 5 C 45 C Storage -25 C 55 C Transport -25 C 70 C latched onto flush-mounted insert 110 x 51 mm ( x H) 0.1 kg EIB-certified in accordance with the EMC guideline and low voltage guideline
Connections
Installation Dimensions Weight Certification CE mark
normaler Erfassungsbereich
2,5 m
1,0 m
6,0 m
2 - 2
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Number of communication objects 11 11 11 12 Max. number of group addresses 29 29 29 29 Max. number of associations 29 29 29 28
Application programs For Bus coupler FM: Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /3 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /3 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /3 Switch Dim Cyclic HVAC Monitg. Constant light /4 For Switch actuator/sensor FM: Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /4 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /4 Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /4 For Switch/dimming actuator FM: Switch Dim Cycl. HVAC Monitg. Constant light /3
11 11 11
29 29 29
29 29 29
12
20
12
Circuit diagrams
+ EIB -
+ EIB -
8 7
2 4 3
L N
1 8 7 2 1 6 5
1 Bus cable 2 Bus terminal 3 Bus coupler FM 4 Switch actuator FM (6110 U-101-500)
5 Switch/dimming actuator FM (6114 U-500) 6 Ballast with 0 (1) - 10V control input 7 Connecting terminals 8 230 V mains voltage
Note
The Busch-Watchdog Presence is solely designed for indoor areas e.g. in schools, offices or private buildings. The full functionality of the device is dependent on the mounting height. The area of detection can also be adapted via a foil which is included with supply.
Application examples and detailed information about e.g. intelligent HVAC system control and setting the potentiometers can be found in the user manual Busch-Watchdog Presence.
April 2007
2 - 3
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

With the application, the presence detector can sense movement in its area of detection and send out switching or value telegrams. The application makes two independent channels available which can be used to switch on the lighting. It also has a monitoring function. During the parameterisation, it should be noted that some parameters (if required) are only visible when High Access is selected and can only then be modified. Master / Slave It is possible to switch several presence detectors together. This is necessary e.g. in rooms in which one presence detector alone is no longer sufficient for the detection. If two or more presence detectors are installed in a room, one presence detector must operate as Standard / Master and all the others must be set to the Slave function. In the Slave function, the presence detector only sends ON telegrams cyclically when it detects movement. The recovery time only runs for the master presence detector. The recovery time is restarted for the master after each ON telegram. To ensure that the presence detection of the master and slave is equal, the same group address must be used for both devices. If different group addresses are used, the recovery time in the master is restarted each time an ON telegram is received cyclically whereby the light is not switched on. The cyclical transmission periods should be as long as possible in order to take the bus load into account. Detection areas The presence detector has four areas of detection. Each area of detection (sensor area) covers 90 of the surrounding area of the presence detector. The sensor areas are counted in a clockwise direction (see diagram Detection areas). It is possible to remove individual sensor areas from the detection via the general parameter Detection area. All the sensor areas are active by default i.e. the presence detector senses movements throughout the surrounding area (360). If the parameter Detection area is set e.g. to Sensor 2&3, the presence detector only detects movement in half of its surroundings (180). It is therefore not necessary to mask individual segments of the lens. Switch The presence detector sends switching telegrams to its communication objects Movement channel Telegr. switch as soon as it senses movement in its area of detection. The value of the switching telegram can be set with the parameter Sending at detection. It is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram once movement has been detected. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. If the presence detector is no longer aware of any movement once the recovery time has elapsed, it is possible for
Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /3
1 lx, PIR
Selection in ETS Busch-Jaeger Elektro Phys. Sensors Presence detector
Detection areas of the presence detector
Detection areas Sensor 1
Sensor 4
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
2 - 4
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegrams to be sent. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. The behaviour is defined with the parameter Telegram after recovery time. Each channel of the presence detector can be enabled/disabled separately. The communication objects Movement channel / Activation are used for this purpose. The objects are made visible with the parameter Activation object movement. If the presence detector receives a telegram at this object, the presence detector is activated or deactivated. With the parameters If movement is , it is possible to set whether an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegrams are sent via the communication object Movement channel Telegr. switch. Example: In a functional building, all the presence detectors should be switched off in the mornings. To do so, a 1 is sent to a central point with a time switch and received at the communication objects Movement channel Activation. In this example, the parameter Enabling movement at is set to ON telegram. Value Value telegrams can also be sent on detection of movement. To do so, the parameter Type of movement object must be changed from Switching (EIS1) to Value (EIS6). Dimming actuators can thus be dimmed to a value which is less than the maximum value e.g. to be dimmed to the background lighting. The value that is sent is defined with the parameter setting Sending at the beginning/end of detection. It is also possible to set that no telegrams are sent. Cyclic Brightness-dependent switching All switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically. It should be ensured that the setting ON telegram cyclically or OFF telegram cyclically is selected in the relevant parameter. The total cycle time can be set with the parameters Time base for cyclical A further communication object can be enabled separately for each channel with the parameter Activation object brightness-dependent switching. If the communication object Brightness-dependent switching channel receives a 1, the presence detector switsending and Time factor for . The period in which a telegram is repeated cyclically is composed of a base and a factor: Cycle time = Base * Factor Channel settings The brightness level at which the presence detector is triggered is set by default via the ETS parameter Threshold illumination. Values between 5 lux and 1000 lux can be entered. It should be noted that the setting for Threshold illumination refers to the installation site of the presence detector and not to the level of the luxmeter. Alternatively, the Lux1 potentiometer can define the threshold. To do so, the setting Threshold illumination adjustable with must be changed to Lux1 potentiometer. The recovery time can be set with the help of the potentiometer on the rear of the presence detector or via the ETS program. The preset option is the ETS variant. The recovery time can be set in ETS with the two parameters Time base of recovery time and Time factor of recovery time. The product of the base and factor forms the recovery time: Recovery time = Base * Factor Note: If both potentiometers are set to POTI, the Test setting is only used for checking the function and area of detection of the device without dependence on the brightness level. In the Test setting, the recovery time set in ETS is not taken into account and is only approx. 10 s (see also the operating instructions for the presence detector). If the setting of the recovery time is defined in ETS with Illumination potentiometer, the recovery time is defined via the illumination potentiometer in the same way as conventional detectors. It is therefore also possible to modify the recovery time without ETS.
April 2007
2 - 5
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

ches dependent on the level of brightness. The switch threshold settings which have been carried out with the potentiometer on the rear of the device or with ETS have therefore no significance for the period of activation. If a 0 is received at the object, the presence detector first sends ON telegrams again once it has fallen below the illumination threshold. Light source If the proportion of external light increases, the presence detector sends an OFF telegram as soon as the external light reaches the required illuminance. The type of light source must be indicated. Example: Illuminance 500 lx The illumination threshold of 500 lx is defined via the potentiometer on the presence detector or via ETS. If movement is now detected in a dark room in the mornings and the brightness value lies below 500 lx, the presence detector sends an ON telegram in the event of movement. a) Switched light source: When the luminaires are switched on they generate an illuminance of 500 lx. The external light is added to this. The presence detector switches off if it measures the illuminance at 1000 lx. b) Controlled light source (constant light): If conventional constant lighting control is integrated in the luminaires, it regulates the proportion of artificial light so that the measured illuminance remains constant at 500 lx. If the presence detector now measures more than 550 lx, the luminaires are already dimmed down to the minimum brighness value and are switched off. Monitoring Note: The Monitoring function does not serve to create a VdS certified alarm system. It offers the possibility to use the EIB/ KNX-system to control rooms. It is not an alternative for an alarm system. It is possible to activate a monitoring function. To do so, the general parameter Monitoring function must be set to yes. The monitoring function is not triggered at the slightest thermal movement but only if a strong energy source is registered during a short interval or several weak sources over a longer period. If the monitoring function is activated, a further communication object Signal Telegr. switch is available. The presence detector records the number and intensity of movements within a time period and only sends telegrams once a specific sensitivity level has been exceeded. On a further Monitoring function tab, it is possible to set the type of the monitoring object (1 bit or 1 byte) and the type of telegram at the start of detection dependent on the intensity and cyclical sending behaviour. The parameter Threshold indicates the level of sensitivity. The value 1 means maximum sensitivity while the value 255 means minimum sensitivity. It can also be parameterised at which point the detector is in monitoring mode after activation. This period is composed of a base and factor in a similar way to the cyclical time. If the monitoring function should be enabled externally, this can be carried out with the communication object Signal Activation. To do so, the parameter Activation object monitoring must previously be set to available.
2 - 6
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Bus voltage recovery The states of the communication objects Movement channel Telegr. switch adopt defined states on bus voltage recovery. The states for channel 1 and 2 can be defined separately. This prevents unwanted switching operations on bus voltage recovery. Defined states can also be selected for the objects Brightness-dependent switching channel . The parameters are only visible if the objects have previously been enabled.
No. 0 1 3 4
Object name Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel
1 1 2 2
No. 0 1 3 4
Object name Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel
1 1 2 2
Communication objects with monitoring objects
No. 6 7
Type 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Signal Signal
Function Telegr. switch Activation
Communication objects with value monitoring objects
No. 6 7
Type 1 byte 1 bit
Function Telegr. value Activation
Communication objects with brightness-dependent switching
No. 2 5
Type 1 bit
Object name Brightness-dependent switching channel 1 Brightness-dependent switching channel 2
Function Activation
1 bit
Activation
April 2007
2 - 7
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Presence detector parameters with Low Access: General: Operation mode illumination channel 1 Standard / Master Slave Operation mode illumination channel 2 Standard / Master Slave Detection area Sensor 1&2 Sensor 2&3 Sensor 3&4 Sensor 1&4 Sensor 1-4 Behaviour on bus voltage recovery (comm. objects) Brightness-dependent switching enabled (Illumination channel 1) disabled Brightness-dependent switching enabled (Illumination channel 2) disabled Movement disabled (Illumination channel 1) enabled Movement disabled (Illumination channel 2) enabled Only if activation object for monitoring function is available: Monitoring function disabled enabled
Parameters The default setting for the values is printed in bold type Note: When using the device in ETS2, some parameters are only visible and selectable in the setting High Access.
Parameters for illumination channel 1 or channel 2: Activation object brightness-dependent not available switching available Activation object movement not available available Only if movement object is available: Enabling movement at ON telegram OFF telegram If Movement is disabled do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection If Movement is enabled do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection Type of movement object Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at detection ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Only in Standard / Master operation mode: Telegram after recovery time ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor for cyclical sending 10 Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at detection 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram Telegram after recovery time 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram
2 - 8
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Parameters for adjustments channel 1 or channel 2: Note: The offset of the brightness value should take place on a luxmeter. (see technical handbook for more information) Threshold illumination adjustable ETS with Lux1 potentiometer Only if set with ETS: Threshold illumination 100 (5 lux 1000 lux) Recovery time adjustable with ETS Illumination potentiometer Only if set with ETS: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor of recovery time 100 Light source switched controlled (constant brightness)
Monitoring function Activation object monitoring Only if available: Enable monitoring function at Type of monitoring object Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at the beginning of detection
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 4 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclical sending Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at the beginning of detection Sending at the end of detection Threshold (1:sensitive / 255:insensitive) Time base until watchdog is in monitoring function Time factor until watchdog is in monitoring function
April 2007
2 - 9
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

With the application, the presence detector can sense movement in its area of detection and send out switching or value telegrams. The application makes two independent channels available which can be used to switch on the lighting and one channel for influencing the HVAC control. During the parameterisation, it should be noted that some parameters (if required) are only visible when High Access is selected and can only then be modified. Master / Slave It is possible to switch several presence detectors together. This is necessary e.g. in rooms in which one presence detector alone is no longer sufficient for the detection. If two or more presence detectors are installed in a room, one presence detector must operate as Standard / Master and all the others must be set to the Slave function. In the Slave function, the presence detector only sends ON telegrams cyclically when it detects movement. The recovery time only runs for the master presence detector. The recovery time is restarted for the master after each ON telegram. To ensure that the presence detection of the master and slave is equal, the same group address must be used for both devices. If different group addresses are used, the recovery time in the master is restarted each time an ON telegram is received cyclically whereby the light is not switched on. The cyclical transmission periods should be as long as possible in order to take the bus load into account. Detection areas The presence detector has four areas of detection. Each area of detection (sensor area) covers 90 of the surrounding area of the presence detector. The sensor areas are counted in a clockwise direction (see diagram Detection areas). It is possible to remove individual sensor areas from the detection via the general parameter Detection area. All the sensor areas are active by default i.e. the presence detector senses movements throughout the surrounding area (360). If the parameter Detection area is set e.g. to Sensor 2&3, the presence detector only detects movement in half of its surroundings (180). It is therefore not necessary to mask individual segments of the lens. Switch The presence detector sends switching telegrams to its communication objects Movement channel Telegr. switch as soon as it senses movement in its area of detection. The value of the switching telegram can be set with the parameter Sending at detection. It is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram once movement has been detected. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. If the presence detector is no longer aware of any movement once the recovery time has elapsed, it is possible for
Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /3
1 lx, PIR
Sensor 4
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
2 - 10
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegrams to be sent. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. The behaviour is defined with the parameter Telegram after recovery time. Each channel of the presence detector can be enabled/disabled separately. The communication objects Movement channel / Activation are used for this purpose. The objects are made visible with the parameter Activation object movement. If the presence detector receives a telegram at this object, the presence detector is activated or deactivated. With the parameters If movement is , it is possible to set whether an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegrams are sent via the communication object Movement channel Telegr. switch. Example: In a functional building, all the presence detectors should be switched off in the mornings. To do so, a 1 is sent to a central point with a time switch and received at the communication objects Movement channel Activation. In this example, the parameter Enabling movement at is set to ON telegram. Value Value telegrams can also be sent on detection of movement. To do so, the parameter Type of movement object must be changed from Switching (EIS1) to Value (EIS6). Dimming actuators can thus be dimmed to a value which is less than the maximum value e.g. to be dimmed to the background lighting. The value that is sent is defined with the parameter setting Sending at the beginning/end of detection. It is also possible to set that no telegrams are sent. Cyclic Brightness-dependent switching All switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically. It should be ensured that the setting ON telegram cyclically or OFF telegram cyclically is selected in the relevant parameter. The total cycle time can be set with the parameters Time base for cyclical A further communication object can be enabled separately for each channel with the parameter Activation object brightness-dependent switching. If the communication object Brightness-dependent switching channel receives a 1, the presence detector switsending and Time factor for . The period in which a telegram is repeated cyclically is composed of a base and a factor: Cycle time = Base * Factor Channel settings The brightness level at which the presence detector is triggered is set by default via the ETS parameter Threshold illumination. Values between 5 lux and 1000 lux can be entered. It should be noted that the setting for Threshold illumination refers to the installation site of the presence detector and not to the level of the luxmeter. Alternatively, the Lux1 potentiometer can define the threshold. To do so, the setting Threshold illumination adjustable with must be changed to Lux1 potentiometer. The recovery time can be set with the help of the potentiometer on the rear of the presence detector or via the ETS program. The preset option is the ETS variant. The recovery time can be set in ETS with the two parameters Time base of recovery time and Time factor of recovery time. The product of the base and factor forms the recovery time: Recovery time = Base * Factor Note: If both potentiometers are set to POTI, the Test setting is only used for checking the function and area of detection of the device without dependence on the brightness level. In the Test setting, the recovery time set in ETS is not taken into account and is only approx. 10 s (see also the operating instructions for the presence detector). If the setting of the recovery time is defined in ETS with Illumination potentiometer, the recovery time is defined via the illumination potentiometer in the same way as conventional detectors. It is therefore also possible to modify the recovery time without ETS.
April 2007
2 - 11
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

ches dependent on the level of brightness. The switch threshold settings which have been carried out with the potentiometer on the rear of the device or with ETS have therefore no significance for the period of activation. If a 0 is received at the object, the presence detector first sends ON telegrams again once it has fallen below the illumination threshold. Light source If the proportion of external light increases, the presence detector sends an OFF telegram as soon as the external light reaches the required illuminance. The type of light source must be indicated. Example: Illuminance 500 lx The illumination threshold of 500 lx is defined via the potentiometer on the presence detector or via ETS. If movement is now detected in a dark room in the mornings and the brightness value lies below 500 lx, the presence detector sends an ON telegram in the event of movement. a) Switched light source: When the luminaires are switched on they generate an illuminance of 500 lx. The external light is added to this. The presence detector switches off if it measures the illuminance at 1000 lx. b) Controlled light source (constant light): If conventional constant lighting control is integrated in the luminaires, it regulates the proportion of artificial light so that the measured illuminance remains constant at 500 lx. If the presence detector now measures more than 550 lx, the luminaires are already dimmed down to the minimum brighness value and are switched off. HVAC The presence detector can activate a heating or ventilation controller with its object Movement HVAC. The object sends telegrams independently of the brightness value. The ON delay is the period which the HVAC channel needs until it detects a movement. By default, this period is set automatically by the presence detector. It can however also be fixed. To do so, the Switch ON delay must be set via ETS. The period is composed of a base and a factor in a similar way to the recovery time. If the switching behaviour is set with the HVAC potentiometer, the following must be noted: If an OFF delay between 1 and 10 min is defined with the potentiometer, the ON delay is set at 30 s. This setting can e.g. switch on a fan in the cloakroom. If the OFF delay is set at longer than 10 min, the operating time is based on the frequency that movement is detected. In a standard office, the heating system is only switched on if the employee is present for a lengthy period. The heating in a conference room which is rarely used is not activated when someone only enters the room briefly and then leaves again after a short period. The Movement HVAC object can trigger a telegram on detection of movement and after an adjustable recovery time. With the parameter Type of movement object, it is set whether 1 bit switching telegrams or 1 byte value telegrams are triggered. The switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically in the same way as the movement channels.
2 - 12
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Bus voltage recovery The states of the communication objects Movement channel Telegr. switch adopt defined states on bus voltage recovery. The states for channel 1 and 2 can be defined separately. This prevents unwanted switching operations on bus voltage recovery. Defined states can also be selected for the objects Brightness-dependent switching channel . The parameters are only visible if the objects have previously been enabled.
No. 0 1 3 4 6 7
Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit
Object name Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel Movement HvAC Movement HVAC
1 1 2 2
Function Telegr. switch Activation Telegr. switch Activation Telegr. switch Activation
No. 0 1 3 4 6 7
Type 1 byte 1 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 byte 1 bit
Object name Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel Movement channel Movement HVAC Movement HVAC
1 1 2 2
Function Telegr. value Activation Telegr. value Activation Telegr. value Activation
No. 2 5
Type 1 bit
Object name Brightness-dependent switching channel 1 Brightness-dependent switching channel 2
Function Activation
1 bit
Activation
April 2007
2 - 13
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

General: Operation mode illumination channel 1 Standard / Master Slave Operation mode illumination channel 2 Standard / Master Slave Detection area Sensor 1&2 Sensor 2&3 Sensor 3&4 Sensor 1&4 Sensor 1-4 Behaviour on bus voltage recovery (comm. objects) Brightness-dependent switching enabled (Illumination channel 1) disabled Brightness-dependent switching enabled (Illumination channel 2) disabled Movement disabled (Illumination channel 1) enabled Movement disabled (HVAC) enabled Movement disabled (Illumination channel 2) enabled
Parameters for illumination channel 1 or channel 2: Activation object brightness-dependent not available switching available Activation object movement not available available Only if activation object for movement is available: Enable movement at ON telegram OFF telegram If Movement is disabled do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection If Movement is enabled do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection Type of movement object Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at detection ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Only in Standard / Master operation mode: Telegram after recovery time ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor for cyclical sending 10 Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at detection 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram Telegram after recovery time 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram
2 - 14
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Parameters for adjustments channel 1 or channel 2: Note: The offset of the brightness value should take place on a luxmeter. (see technical handbook for more information) Threshold illumination adjustable ETS with Lux1 potentiometer Only if set with ETS: Threshold illumination 100 (5 Lux 1000 lux) Recovery time adjustable with ETS Illumination potentiometer Only if set with ETS: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor of recovery time 100 Light source switched controlled (constant light)
HVAC: Activation object movement Only if activation object is available: Enabling movement at If Movement is disabled
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 10 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram
If Movement is enabled
Type of movement object Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at detection
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclical sending Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at detection Telegram after recovery time
April 2007
2 - 15
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Adjustments HVAC: Recovery time adjustable with Only if set with ETS: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time Time factor of recovery time Switch ON is adjustable Only if set with ETS: Time base of switch ON delay Time factor of switch ON delay
ETS HVAC potentiometer
0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 automatically by ETS 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
2 - 16
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

With the application, the presence detector can sense movement in its area of detection and send out switching or value telegrams. The application makes two independent channels available. One channel can switch on the lighting while the other can switch on an HVAC system. The presence detector also has a monitoring function. During the parameterisation, it should be noted that some parameters (if required) are only visible when High Access is selected and can only then be modified. Master / Slave It is possible to switch several presence detectors together. This is necessary e.g. in rooms in which one presence detector alone is no longer sufficient for the detection. If two or more presence detectors are installed in a room, one presence detector must operate as Standard / Master and all the others must be set to the Slave function. In the Slave function, the presence detector only sends ON telegrams cyclically when it detects movement. The recovery time only runs for the master presence detector. The recovery time is restarted for the master after each ON telegram. To ensure that the presence detection of the master and slave is equal, the same group address must be used for both devices. If different group addresses are used, the recovery time in the master is restarted each time an ON telegram is received cyclically whereby the light is not switched on. The cyclical transmission periods should be as long as possible in order to take the bus load into account. Detection areas The presence detector has four areas of detection. Each area of detection (sensor area) covers 90 of the surrounding area of the presence detector. The sensor areas are counted in a clockwise direction (see diagram Detection areas). It is possible to remove individual sensor areas from the detection via the general parameter Detection area. All the sensor areas are active by default i.e. the presence detector senses movements throughout the surrounding area (360). If the parameter Detection area is set e.g. to Sensor 2&3, the presence detector only detects movement in half of its surroundings (180). It is therefore not necessary to mask individual segments of the lens. Switch The presence detector sends switching telegrams to its communication objects Movement channel Telegr. switch as soon as it senses movement in its area of detection. The value of the switching telegram can be set with the parameter Sending at detection. It is possible to send an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegram once movement has been detected. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. If the presence detector is no longer aware of any movement once the recovery time has elapsed, it is possible for
Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring /3
1 lx, PIR
Sensor 4
Sensor 2
Sensor 3
April 2007
2 - 17
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegrams to be sent. The ON or OFF telegrams can also be sent cyclically. The behaviour is defined with the parameter Telegram after recovery time. Each channel of the presence detector can be enabled/disabled separately. The communication objects Movement channel / Activation are used for this purpose. The objects are made visible with the parameter Activation object movement. If the presence detector receives a telegram at this object, the presence detector is activated or deactivated. With the parameters If movement is , it is possible to set whether an ON telegram, an OFF telegram or no telegrams are sent via the communication object Movement channel Telegr. switch. Example: In a functional building, all the presence detectors should be switched off in the mornings. To do so, a 1 is sent to a central point with a time switch and received at the communication objects Movement channel Activation. In this example, the parameter Enabling movement at is set to ON telegram. Value Value telegrams can also be sent on detection of movement. To do so, the parameter Type of movement object must be changed from Switching (EIS1) to Value (EIS6). Dimming actuators can thus be dimmed to a value which is less than the maximum value e.g. to be dimmed to the background lighting. The value that is sent is defined with the parameter setting Sending at the beginning/end of detection. It is also possible to set that no telegrams are sent. Cyclic Brightness-dependent switching All switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically. It should be ensured that the setting ON telegram cyclically or OFF telegram cyclically is selected in the relevant parameter. The total cycle time can be set with the parameters Time base for cyclical sending and Time factor for . The A further communication object can be enabled separately for each channel with the parameter Activation object brightness-dependent switching. If the communication object Brightness-dependent switching channel receives a 1, the presence detector switches dependent on the level of brightperiod in which a telegram is repeated cyclically is composed of a base and a factor: Cycle time = Base * Factor Channel settings The brightness level at which the presence detector is triggered is set by default via the ETS parameter Threshold illumination. Values between 5 lux and 1000 lux can be entered. It should be noted that the setting for Threshold illumination refers to the installation site of the presence detector and not to the level of the luxmeter. Alternatively, the Lux1 potentiometer can define the threshold. To do so, the setting Threshold illumination adjustable with must be changed to Lux1 potentiometer. The recovery time can be set with the help of the potentiometer on the rear of the presence detector or via the ETS program. The preset option is the ETS variant. The recovery time can be set in ETS with the two parameters Time base of recovery time and Time factor of recovery time. The product of the base and factor forms the recovery time: Recovery time = Base * Factor Note: If both potentiometers are set to POTI, the Test setting is only used for checking the function and area of detection of the device without dependence on the brightness level. In the Test setting, the recovery time set in ETS is not taken into account and is only approx. 10 s (see also the operating instructions for the presence detector). If the setting of the recovery time is defined in ETS with Illumination potentiometer, the recovery time is defined via the illumination potentiometer in the same way as conventional detectors. It is therefore also possible to modify the recovery time without ETS.
2 - 18
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

ness. The switch threshold settings which have been carried out with the potentiometer on the rear of the device or with ETS have therefore no significance for the period of activation. If a 0 is received at the object, the presence detector first sends ON telegrams again once it has fallen below the illumination threshold. Light source If the proportion of external light increases, the presence detector sends an OFF telegram as soon as the external light reaches the required illuminance. The type of light source must be indicated. Example: Illuminance 500 lx The illumination threshold of 500 lx is defined via the potentiometer on the presence detector or via ETS. If movement is now detected in a dark room in the mornings and the brightness value lies below 500 lx, the presence detector sends an ON telegram in the event of movement. a) Switched light source: When the luminaires are switched on they generate an illuminance of 500 lx. The external light is added to this. The presence detector switches off if it measures the illuminance at 1000 lx. b) Controlled light source (constant light): If conventional constant lighting control is integrated in the luminaires, it regulates the proportion of artificial light so that the measured illuminance remains constant at 500 lx. If the presence detector now measures more than 550 lx, the luminaires are already dimmed down to the minimum brighness value and are switched off. HVAC The presence detector can activate a heating or ventilation controller with its object Movement HVAC. The object sends telegrams independently of the brightness value. The ON delay is the period which the HVAC channel needs until it detects a movement. By default, this period is set automatically by the presence detector. It can however also be fixed. To do so, the Switch ON delay must be set via ETS. The period is composed of a base and a factor in a similar way to the recovery time. If the switching behaviour is set with the HVAC potentiometer, the following must be noted: If an OFF delay between 1 and 10 min is defined with the potentiometer, the ON delay is set at 30 s. This setting can e.g. switch on a fan in the cloakroom. If the OFF delay is set at longer than 10 min, the operating time is based on the frequency that movement is detected. In a standard office, the heating system is only switched on if the employee is present for a lengthy period. The heating in a conference room which is rarely used is not activated when someone only enters the room briefly and then leaves again after a short period. The Movement HVAC object can trigger a telegram on detection of movement and after an adjustable recovery time. With the parameter Type of movement object, it is set whether 1 bit switching telegrams or 1 byte value telegrams are triggered. The switching telegrams can also be sent cyclically in the same way as the movement channels. Monitoring The Monitoring function does not serve to create a VdS certified alarm system. It offers the possibility to use the EIB/ KNX-system to control rooms. It is not an alternative for an alarm system. It is possible to activate a monitoring function. To do so, the general parameter Monitoring function must be set to yes. The monitoring function is not triggered at the slightest thermal movement but only if a strong energy source is registered during a short interval or several weak sources over a longer period. If the monitoring function is activated, a further communication object Signal Telegr. switch is available. The presence detector records the number and intensity of movements within a time period and only sends telegrams once a specific sensitivity level has been exceeded. On a further Monitoring function tab, it is possible to set the type of the moni-
April 2007
2 - 19
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

toring object (1 bit or 1 byte) and the type of telegram at the start of detection dependent on the intensity and cyclical sending behaviour. The parameter Threshold indicates the level of sensitivity. The value 1 means maximum sensitivity while the value 255 means minimum sensitivity. It can also be parameterised at which point the detector is in monitoring mode after activation. This period is composed of a base and factor in a similar way to the cyclical time. If the monitoring function should be enabled externally, this can be carried out with the communication object Signal Activation. To do so, the parameter Activation object monitoring must previously be set to available. Bus voltage recovery The states of the communication objects Movement channel Telegr. switch adopt defined states on bus voltage recovery. The states for channel 1 and 2 can be defined separately. This prevents unwanted switching operations on bus voltage recovery. Defined states can also be selected for the objects Brightness-dependent switching channel . The parameters are only visible if the objects have previously been enabled.
2 - 20
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

No. 0 1 3 4 6 Type 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit Object name Movement channel 1 Movement channel 1 Movement HVAC Movement HVAC Signal Function Telegr. switch Activation Telegr. switch Activation Telegr. switch
No. 0 1 3 4
Object name Movement channel 1 Movement channel 1 Movement HVAC Movement HVAC
Communication objects with monitoring objects
No. 6 7
Type 1 bit 1 bit
Function Telegr. switch Activation
Communication objects with value monitoring objects
No. 6 7
Type 1 byte 1 bit
Function Telegr. value Activation
No. 2
Type 1 bit
Object name Brightness-dependent switching channel 1
Function Activation
April 2007
2 - 21
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

General: Operation mode illumination 1 Detection area
Standard / Master Slave Sensor 1&2 Sensor 2&3 Sensor 3&4 Sensor 1&4 Sensor 1-4
Behaviour on bus voltage recovery (comm. objects) Brightness-dependent switching (Illumination channel 1) Movement (Illumination channel 1) Movement (HVAC channel 2) Monitoring function
enabled disabled disabled enabled disabled enabled disabled enabled
Parameters for illumination channel 1: Activation object brightness-dependent not available switching available Activation object movement not available available Only if activation object for movement is available: Enable movement at ON telegram OFF telegram If Movement is disabled do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection If Movement is enabled do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection Type of movement object Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at detection ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Only in Standard / Master mode: Telegram after recovery time ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram Time base for cyclical sending 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor for cyclical sending 10 Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at detection 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram Telegram after recovery time 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram
2 - 22
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Parameters for adjustments channel 1: Note: The offset of the brightness value should take place on a luxmeter. (see technical handbook for more information) Threshold illumination adjustable ETS with Lux1 potentiometer Only if set with ETS: Threshold illumination 100 (5 lux 1000 lux) Recovery time adjustable with ETS Illumination potentiometer Only if set with ETS: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min Time factor of recovery time 100 Light source switched controlled (constant light)
HVAC: Activation object movement Only if activation object is available: Enable movement at If Movement is disabled
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection do not send a telegram send telegram once at movement send telegram once after detection Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 10 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100% / 90 % / / 10 % / OFF / no telegram
If Movement is enabled
Type of movement object Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at detection
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclical sending Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at detection Telegram after recovery time
April 2007
2 - 23
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Adjustments HVAC: Recovery time adjustable with Only if set with ETS: Potentiometer should not be at TEST Time base of recovery time Time factor of recovery time Switch ON delay is adjustable Only if set with ETS: Time base of switch ON delay Time factor of switch ON delay
ETS HVAC potentiometer
0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 automatically by ETS 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
Monitoring function Activation object monitoring Only if available: Enable monitoring function at Type of monitoring object Only for Switching (EIS1): Sending at the beginning of detection
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram Switching (EIS1) Value (EIS6) ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram ON telegram OFF telegram ON telegram cyclically OFF telegram cyclically no telegram 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 100 % / 90 % / / 20 % / 10 % / OFF / no telegram 4 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
Time base for cyclical sending Time factor for cyclical sending Only for Value (EIS6): Sending at the beginning of detection Sending at the end of detection Threshold (1:sensitive / 255:insensitive) Time base until watchdog is in monitoring function Time factor until watchdog is in monitoring function
2 - 24
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

The application program is intended for the presence detector in connection with a flush-mounted bus coupler. Note: The descriptions for Switch, Value, Cyclic, Channel settings, Brightness-dependent switching, Light source, HVAC and Monitoring have been outlined in the application description Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring. The following section describes the dimming function and constant lighting control. Dim The application has a 1 bit communication object Output - Switching and a 4 bit communication object. Both objects are used to detect whether the brightness of the luminaires has been modified manually by a switching or dimming telegram. If the presence detector detects a switching or dimming telegram via these objects, it temporarily switches the constant lighting control off. The initial brightness value is defined in the parameters. If required, a constant value between 10 % brightness and 100 % brightness can be selected. Using the 1 byte communication object Dimmer - Brightness value, the connected luminaire can be assigned one of 256 brightness values in a range between 0 = switched off to 255 = full brightness. Constant light The constant lighting control can refer to one or several dimming actuators. The current brightness value is sent via the communication object Dimmer - Brightness value. It must be ensured that the dimming actuators which are used in this case have entered a common group address at their brightness object. The constant lighting control can be activated or deactivated at any time via the EIB. The object Constant brightness controller - Activation is used for this purpose. If a telegram with the value 1 is received at this object, the constant lighting control is switched on. It is switched off if a telegram with the value 0 is sent to the object. If the constant lighting control should for example be switched on directly on detection of movement, the objects Movement - Telegr. switch and Constant brightness controller - Activation must be linked together via a common group address. If an OFF telegram is sent to the 1 bit object Output - Switching, the constant lighting control is deactivated. No further telegrams are sent via the object Brightness value. If an ON telegram is sent to the 1 bit object Output - Switching, the constant lighting control is activated. The parameterised initial brightness value is sent first. The constant lighting control then starts and regulates via the Brightness value object the actuators that are linked with a group address. The time which the controller needs to pass through the complete dimming range is defined with the parameter Speed of control loop. It is more pleasant for the human eye if the brightness level remains as constant as possible. Rapid changes in the brightness level are disruptive. In addition to the speed of the control loop, there is the Dimming step size of the control. A slow control setting is preset which means that the constant lighting control always increases or reduces the brightness value by plus/minus two. Example: The actual brightness value is 104 but the room brightness is too dark. The presence detector sends a telegram with the value 106 to its communication object Dimmer - Brightness value. If it determines via its light sensor that the room lighting is sufficient, no further telegrams are sent. If it is still too dark, a telegram with the value 108 is sent. This process is repeated until the required brightness level is reached. A brightness value that is too high is dim-
Switch Dim Cyclic HVAC Monitg. Constant light /4
1 lx, PIR
April 2007
2 - 25
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

med down using the same process but in the opposite direction. The Dimming step size of the control can also be be set to -2/+16 (fast control at dimming up). In this setting, the presence detector always increases the brightness value by +16 if it establishes that there is insufficient light in the room. If the required brightness value is dimmed too far, the presence detector continues to send telegrams with smaller brightness values and thus dims down again. The fast control is particularly a good idea if the room is protected against strong sunlight by blinds. In the setting slow control, the constant lighting control could supply the room with insufficient brightness due to the blind being lowered. It would become too dark temporarily and the period until the constant lighting control could adjust the brightness level accordingly would be too long. Normally, the constant lighting control switches off the connected dimming actuators when the brightness value reaches the value 0. This means that the brightness level in the room is sufficient and the connected luminaires do not need to remain switched on at the minimum brightness. For some electronic ballasts, which always switch on at maximum brightness and are only then dimmed down, it is advisable to change the setting. The parameter Constant brightness controller minimum is used for this purpose. In the setting 1, the presence detector is no longer switched off but remains at its minimum brightness value while it still detects movement. If it now becomes dark again, the electronic ballasts would dim up as normal without briefly indicating maximum brightness. It is possible to select via the ETS program the value at which the constant lighting control should be set. The setpoint for the constant lighting control is entered directly. This can be a brightness value between 5 and 1000 lux. It is however better to allow the user to enter the required brightness value directly. The communication object Constant brightness controller - Save act. brightness value is available for this purpose. As soon as a telegram with the value 1 is received at this object, the presence detector adopts the current brightness value as the new setpoint value for the constant lighting control. The controller must then be restarted. This can either be carried out via the object Output - Switching or with an ON telegram or following detection of movement once the previous recovery time has elapsed. A new setpoint can be assigned at any time via the 1 byte communication object Constant brightness controller Brightness setpoint/act. value (see example). If the user leaves the room, the presence detector starts the recovery time which is set on the tab Adjustments channel 1. If the user has however previously adapted the brightness value to his requirements via the dimming objects, the presence detector starts the recovery time of the inactive constant lighting control once the normal recovery time has elapsed. This means that if someone should enter the room during this period, the presence detector/bus coupler combination will not start the constant lighting control again but the object Dimmer - Brightness value will send its last active brightness value. The presence detector can switch on the constant lighting control mode directly after bus voltage recovery or be disabled. A corresponding setting is available on the General tab. The current Brightness setpoint/actual value is not stored in the event of a bus voltage failure. If a specific brightness value should be set after bus voltage recovery, it should be sent again to the object Constant brightness controller - Brightness setpoint/ act. value. Example: Constant lighting control should be used on a tennis court to save energy. A brightness level of 200 lux should be used during leisure mode while a value of 500 lux should be used during competition mode. The presence detector on a flushmounted bus coupler, a built-in switch/ dimming actuator and a 1-fold switch sensor (application Value) are used for toggling between the two constant lighting modes.
2 - 26
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Care should be taken that the same group addresses are entered in the communication objects for dimming in both the presence detector and the switch/dimming actuator. The presence detector must be installed in an appropriate position and put into operation. After commissioning, the illuminance must be determined with a measuring device. The current brightness value of the actuator can be modified via the dimming objects until an illuminance of 200 lx is achieved. This adjustment should take place in test mode. The corresponding parameter must be set to test mode for this period. After each switching or dimming process, the presence detector sends the current actual brightness value via the object Constant brightness controller Brightness setpoint/act. value. The transmit flag must be set by default. The actual value that is sent can be recorded with the help of the telegram recording function in ETS. The recorded value can now be entered in the parameters of the 1-fold switch sensor with the application Value. The dimming actuator is then dimmed up to 500 lx. The presence detector then sends the current setpoint/actual value again automatically. The value that is now recorded can likewise be entered in the parameters of the 1-fold switch sensor, in the same way as the value for 200 lx. When selecting the application of the switch sensor, it should be noted that the communication objects of the rokkers can send 1 byte values. Then put the switch sensor into operation and the constant lighting control with toggling between two operating modes is implemented.
April 2007
2 - 27
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

No. 6 7 8 9 10 11 Type 1 bit 4 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte Object name Output Dimmer Dimmer Const. brightn. controller Const. brightn. controller Const. brightn. controller Function Switching Rel. dimming Brightness value Activation Save act. brightness value Brightness setpoint/act. value
Additional communication objects for constant lighting control
Additional parameters for constant lighting control. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type Note: When using the device in ETS2, some parameters are only visible and selectable in the setting High Access.
Behaviour on bus voltage recovery: (comm. objects) Movement (Illumination channell 1) Movement (HVAC channel 2) Only if activation object for monitoring function is available: Monitoring function Only if activation object for constant brightness controller is available Constant brightness controller
disabled enabled disabled enabled
disabled enabled
disabled enabled
Constant brightness controller: Activation object constant brightness control Only if activation object is available: Enabling constant brightness control at Switch ON brightness Constant brightness controller minimum is Dimming step size of the control
not available available ON telegram OFF telegram 10 % / 20 % / / 50% / / 100% 0 (OFF) 1 -2 / +2 (slow control) -2 / +16 (fast control at dimming up) test mode (2.5 min) fast (4 min) normal (10 min) slow (19 min) 20 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
Speed of control loop
Setpoint brightness control (5 lux 1000 lux) Time base of recovery time Time factor of recovery time
2 - 28
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX
Busch-Watchdog Presence EIB Type: 6110 U-101-500 + 6131-xxx-102-500

The application program is intended for the presence detector in connection with the flush-mounted switch actuator/ sensor. Note: The descriptions for Switch, Value, Cyclic, Channel settings, Brightness-dependent switching, Light source, and Monitoring have been outlined in the application description Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring. The following section describes the function of the relay output. Relay The relay contact can be parameterised for different applications as a normally open or a normally closed contact. The relay output has its own communication object Output - Switching. The relay output can thus be switched via the EIB without dependence on the presence detector. If the relay should be triggered by the presence detector, the communication objects Movement channel / Telegr. switch and Output - Switching must be linked with a common group address. During normal operation, the relay output can also be parameterised with ON and OFF times. This periods are composed of a base and a factor. In the staircase lighting function, an operating time is available as in normal operation. The period of the staircase lighting function is parameterised via a base and a factor. The actuator can send its status on the EIB. To do so, the parameter Status response must be set to yes. In this case, the communication object Output - Status is available. If the value 1 is sent, it means that the relay has picked up. The sending of the status is not dependent on the setting normally open contact or normally closed contact. The behaviour of the relay output on bus voltage recovery can be set via the parameter Contact at bus voltage recovery and is set by default to OFF. If the relay should close on bus voltage recovery, the parameter Contact at bus voltage recovery must be changed to ON.
Switch Value Cyclic Monitoring /4
1 lx, PIR
April 2007
2 - 29
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

No. 8 10 Type 1 bit 1 bit Object name Output Output Function Switching Status
Additional communication objects for relay output.
Additional parameters for output of flush-mounted switch actuator. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type Note: When using the device in ETS2, some parameters are only visible and selectable in the setting High Access.
General: Contact at bus voltage recovery (FM switch actuator)
ON OFF
Output switch act. FM: Operation mode Switch ON delay Only if yes is selected: Time base of switch ON delay Time factor of switch ON delay (1 255) Only for normal operation: Switch OFF delay Only if yes is selected: Time base for switch OFF delay Time factor for switch OFF delay (1 255) Only for staircase lighting function: Time base for staircase lighting function Factor for staircase lighting function (1 255) Status response Relay is
normal operation staircase lighting function yes no 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 64
yes no 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 10
0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 10 yes no normally closed contact normally open contact
2 - 30
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

The application program is intended for the presence detector in connection with the flush-mounted switch actuator/ sensor. Note: The descriptions for Switch, Value, Cyclic, Channel settings, Brightness-dependent switching, Light source, and HVAC have been outlined in the application description Switch Value Cyclic HVAC. The following section describes the function of the relay output. Relay The relay contact can be parameterised for different applications as a normally open or a normally closed contact. The relay output has its own communication object Output - Switching. The relay output can thus be switched via the EIB without dependence on the presence detector. If the relay should be triggered by the presence detector, the communication objects Movement channel / Telegr. switch and Output - Switching must be linked with a common group address. During normal operation, the relay output can also be parameterised with ON and OFF times. This periods are composed of a base and a factor. In the staircase lighting function, an operating time is available as in normal operation. The period of the staircase lighting function is parameterised via a base and a factor. The actuator can send its status on the EIB. To do so, the parameter Status response must be set to yes. In this case, the communication object Output - Status is available. If the value 1 is sent, it means that the relay has picked up. The sending of the status is not dependent on the setting normally open contact or normally closed contact. The behaviour of the relay output on bus voltage recovery can be set via the parameter Contact at bus voltage recovery and is set by default to OFF. If the relay should close on bus voltage recovery, the parameter Contact at bus voltage recovery must be changed to ON.
Switch Value Cyclic HVAC /4
1 lx, PIR
April 2007
2 - 31
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

ON OFF
2 - 32
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

The application program is intended for the presence detector in connection with the flush-mounted switch actuator/ sensor. Note: The descriptions for Switch, Value, Cyclic, Channel settings, Brightness-dependent switching, Light source HVAC and Monitoring have been outlined in the application description Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring. The following section describes the function of the relay output. Relay The relay contact can be parameterised for different applications as a normally open or a normally closed contact. The relay output has its own communication object Output - Switching. The relay output can thus be switched via the EIB without dependence on the presence detector. If the relay should be triggered by the presence detector, the communication objects Movement channel / Telegr. switch and Output - Switching must be linked with a common group address. The behaviour of the relay output on bus voltage recovery can be set via the parameter Contact at bus voltage recovery and is set by default to OFF. If the relay should close on bus voltage recovery, the parameter Contact at bus voltage recovery must be changed to ON. During normal operation, the relay output can also be parameterised with ON and OFF times. This periods are composed of a base and a factor. In the staircase lighting function, an operating time is available as in normal operation. The period of the staircase lighting function is parameterised via a base and a factor. The actuator can send its status on the EIB. To do so, the parameter Status response must be set to yes. In this case, the communication object Output - Status is available. If the value 1 is sent, it means that the relay has picked up. The sending of the status is not dependent on the setting normally open contact or normally closed contact.
Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring/4
1 lx, PIR
April 2007
2 - 33
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

ON OFF
2 - 34
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX
Busch-Watchdog Presence EIB Type: 6114 U-500 + 6131-xxx-102-500

The application program is intended for the presence detector in connection with the flush-mounted switch/dimming actuator. Note: The descriptions for Switch, Value, Cyclic, Channel settings, Brightness-dependent switching, Light source, HVAC and Monitoring have been outlined in the application description Switch Value Cyclic HVAC Monitoring. The following section describes the function of the switch/dimming actuator and constant lighting control. Switch/dimming actuator The output can be switched on and off via the 1 bit communication object Output - Switching. The same communication object also sends a telegram if the output modifies its state because e.g. the 4 bit object Dimmer Rel. dimming or the 1 byte object Dimmer - Brightness value has received a telegram. To do so, the transmit flag must however be set. The brightness value which the switch/ dimming actuator uses when it is switched on is defined in the parameters. A constant value between 10% brightness and 100% brightness can be selected. With the 4 bit communication object Dimmer - Rel. dimming, the connected luminaires can be dimmed in accordance with EIS 2. If the actuator is switched off, it can be dimmed on via the 4 bit object. With the 1 byte communication object Dimmer - Brightness value, one of 256 brightness values in the range of 0 = switched off to 256 = full brightness can be assigned to the connected luminaires. The object can also send the modified brightness value to other dimmers. To do so, the transmit flag must be set. The setting internal and external dimmer sets the transmit flag automatically. The time which a connected luminaire needs to be dimmed from minimum to maximum brightness is called the dimming speed. The dimming speed used by the actuator to dim the connected luminaires is defined via the corresponding setting on the Dimmer parameter page. The minimum setting for the dimming speed is 2 s while the maximum is 3 min. Note: When the constant lighting control is active, the dimming speed must be shorter than the speed of the control loop as otherwise the constant lighting control would already send a new brightness value although the luminaire has still not been dimmed to its current brightness value due to the high dimming speed. Constant light The constant lighting control can refer to one or several dimming actuators. The current brightness value is sent via the communication object Dimmer - Brightness value. It must be ensured that the dimming actuators which are used in this case have entered a common group address at their brightness object. The constant lighting control can be activated or deactivated at any time via the EIB. The object Constant brightness controller - Activation is used for this purpose. If a telegram with the value 1 is received at this object, the constant lighting control is switched on. It is switched off if a telegram with the value 0 is sent to the object. If the constant lighting control should for example be switched on directly on detection of movement, the objects Movement - Telegr. switch and Constant brightness controller - Activation must be linked together via a common group address. If an OFF telegram is sent to the 1 bit object Output - Switching, the constant lighting control is deactivated. No further telegrams are sent via the object Brightness value. If an ON telegram is sent to the 1 bit object Output - Switching, the con-
Switch Dim Cycl. HVAC Monitg. Constant light /3
1 lx, PIR
April 2007
2 - 35
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

stant lighting control is activated. The parameterised initial brightness value is sent first. The constant lighting control then starts and regulates via the Brightness value object the actuators that are linked with a group address. The time which the controller needs to pass through the complete dimming range is defined with the parameter Speed of control loop. It is more pleasant for the human eye if the brightness level remains as constant as possible. Rapid changes in the brightness level are disruptive. In addition to the speed of the control loop, there is the Dimming step size of the control. A slow control setting is preset which means that the constant lighting control always increases or reduces the brightness value by plus/minus two. Example: The actual brightness value is 104 but the room brightness is too dark. The presence detector sends a telegram with the value 106 to its communication object Dimmer - Brightness value. If it determines via its light sensor that the room lighting is sufficient, no further telegrams are sent. If it is still too dark, a telegram with the value 108 is sent. This process is repeated until the required brightness level is reached. A brightness value that is too high is dimmed down using the same process but in the opposite direction. The Dimming step size of the control can also be be set to -2/+16 (fast control at dimming up). In this setting, the presence detector always increases the brightness value by +16 if it establishes that there is insufficient light in the room. If the required brightness value is dimmed too far, the presence detector continues to send telegrams with smaller brightness values and thus dims down again. The fast control is particularly a good idea if the room is protected against strong sunlight by blinds. In the setting slow control, the constant lighting control could supply the room with insufficient brightness due to the blind being lowered. It would become too dark temporarily and the period until the constant brightness controller could adjust the brightness level accordingly would be too long. Normally, the constant lighting control switches off the connected dimming actuators when the brightness value reaches the value 0. This means that the brightness level in the room is sufficient and the connected luminaires do not need to remain switched on at the minimum brightness. For some electronic ballasts, which always switch on at maximum brightness and are only then dimmed down, it is advisable to change the setting. The parameter Constant brightness controller minimum is used for this purpose. In the setting 1, the presence detector is no longer switched off but remains at its minimum brightness value while it still detects movement. If it now becomes dark again, the electronic ballasts would dim up as normal without briefly indicating maximum brightness. It is possible to select via the ETS program the value at which the constant lighting control should be set. The setpoint for the constant lighting control is entered directly. This can be a brightness value between 5 and 1000 lux. It is however better to allow the user to enter the required brightness value directly. The communication object Constant brightness controller - Save act. brightness value is available for this purpose. As soon as a telegram with the value 1 is received at this object, the presence detector adopts the current brightness value as the new setpoint value for the constant lighting control. The controller must then be restarted. This can either be carried out via the object Output - Switching or with an ON telegram or following detection of movement once the previous recovery time has elapsed. A new setpoint can be assigned at any time via the 1 byte communication object Constant brightness controller Brightness setpoint/act. value (see example). If the user leaves the room, the presence detector starts the recovery time which is set on the tab Adjustments channel 1. If the user has however previously adapted the brightness value to his requirements via the dimming objects, the presence detector starts the recovery time of the inactive constant lighting control once the normal recovery time has elapsed. This means that if someone should
2 - 36
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

enter the room during this period, the presence detector/bus coupler combination will not start the constant lighting control again but the object Dimmer - Brightness value will send its last active brightness value. The presence detector can switch on the constant lighting control mode directly after bus voltage recovery or be disabled. A corresponding setting is available on the General tab. The current Brightness setpoint/actual value is not stored in the event of a bus voltage failure. If a specific brightness value should be set after bus voltage recovery, it should be sent again to the object Constant brightness controller - Brightness setpoint/ act. value. Example: Constant lighting control should be used on a tennis court to save energy. A brightness level of 200 lux should be used during leisure mode while a value of 500 lux should be used during competition mode. The presence detector on a flushmounted bus coupler, a built-in switch/ dimming actuator and a 1-fold switch sensor (application Value) are used for toggling between the two constant lighting modes. Care should be taken that the same group addresses are entered in the communication objects for dimming in both the presence detector and the switch/dimming actuator. an illuminance of 200 lx is achieved. This adjustment should take place in test mode. The corresponding parameter must be set to test mode for this period. After each switching or dimming process, the presence detector sends the current actual brightness value via the object Constant brightness controller Brightness setpoint/act. value. The transmit flag must be set by default. The actual value that is sent can be recorded with the help of the telegram recording function in ETS. The recorded value can now be entered in the parameters of the 1-fold switch sensor with the application Value. The dimming actuator is then dimmed up to 500 lx. The presence detector then sends the current setpoint/actual value again automatically. The value that is now recorded can likewise be entered in the parameters of the 1-fold switch sensor, in the same way as the value for 200 lx. When selecting the application of the switch sensor, it should be noted that the communication objects of the rokkers can send 1 byte values. Then put the switch sensor into operation and the constant lighting control with toggling between two operating modes is implemented.
The presence detector must be installed in an appropriate position and put into operation. After commissioning, the illuminance must be determined with a measuring device. The current brightness value of the actuator can be modified via the dimming objects until
Additional communication objects for switch/dimming actuator FM.
No. 6 7 8 9 10 11
Type 1 bit 4 bit 1 byte 1 bit 1 bit 1 byte
Object name Output Dimmer Dimmer Const. brightn. controller Const. brightn. controller Const. brightn. controller
Function Switching Rel. dimming Brightness value Activation Save act. brightness value Brightness setpoint/act. value
April 2007
2 - 37
ABB i-bus EIB/KNX

Additional parameters for constant lighting control and dimmer output. The default setting for the values is printed in bold type Note: When using the device in ETS2, some parameters are only visible and selectable in the setting High Access.
Behaviour on bus voltage recovery: (comm. objects) Movement (Illumination channell 1) Movement (HVAC channel 2) Only if activation object for monitoring function is available: Monitoring function Only if activation object for constant brightness controller is available Constant brightness controller
disabled enabled disabled enabled
disabled enabled
disabled enabled
Constant brightness controller: Type of dimming actuator Activation object constant brightness control Only if activation object is available: Enabling constant brightness control at Switch ON brightness Constant brightness controller minimum Dimming step size of the control
internal dimmer internal and external dimmer not available available ON telegram OFF telegram 10 % / 20 % / / 50% / / 100% 0 (OFF) 1 -2 / +2 (slow control) -2 / +16 (fast control at dimming up) test mode (2.5 min) fast (4 min) normal (10 min) slow (19 min) 20 0.5 ms / 8.2 ms / 130 ms / 2.1 s / 34 s / 9 min 100
Speed of control loop
Setpoint brightness control (5 lux 1000 lux) Time base of recovery time Time factor of recovery time Dimmer: The dimming speed has to be slower than the speed of the control loop. Dimming speed
2 s / 3.5 s / 5.5 s / 7 s / 10 s / 15 s / 20 s / 45 s / 1 min / 2 min / 3 min
2 - 38
April 2007
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
USB Interface, 2-fold, MDRC USB/S 1.1, 2CDG 110 008 R0011
The USB interface USB/S 1.1 enables communication between the PC and the EIB installation. The data transfer is indicated by the EIB LED and the USB LED. The USB interface can be used from ETS 3 V1.0 onwards.
2CDC 071 195 F0004
The ABB i-bus connection is carried out at the front of the device via the bus connecting terminal supplied. The connection to the USB is likewise carried out at the front of the device.
The USB interface is simply connected to the ABB i-bus and then connected to the USB. The USB interface is automatically detected under the PC operating system and installed.
Technical Data Operating voltage

ABB i-bus EIB / KNX Max. power consumption from the
typically 30 V DC (21 ... 32 V DC)
Interface Operating and display elements Connections
Temperature range
Type of protection Protection class CE norm Certification Installation Dimensions Mounting depth Width in modules Weight Housing Housing colour Model Device type Design
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX 12 mA at 20 V Max. leakage loss of the ABB i-bus EIB / KNX 240 mW USB voltage 5 V DC Max. power consumption from the USB 60 mA Max. leakage loss of the USB 300 mW Max. total leakage loss (ABB i-bus EIB / KNX and USB) 540 mW USB USB standard 1.1 Programming LED for assignment of the phys. address Programming button for assignment of the phys. address ABB i-bus EIB / KNX via bus connecting terminal, screwless USB via USB socket type B, max. cable length 5m (standard) Operation 0 C ... + 45 C Storage 25 C ... + 55 C Transport 25 C ... + 70 C IP 20 DIN EN 60 529 Class II in accordance with EMC and low voltage guidelines EIB / KNX Certificate on 35 mm mounting rail DIN EN 60 715 90 x 36 x 64.5 (H x W x D) 64.5 mm 2 2 modules at 18 mm 0.09 kg Plastic grey Modular installation device Modular DIN rail mounted device MDRC System pro M
USB/S 1.1
Page 1 of 4 USBS_11_TD_EN_V1-0 2CDC 502 031 D0201
USB/S 1.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Number of communication objects 0 Max. number of group addresses 0 Max. number of associations 0
Application programs USB Interface /1
Dimension drawing
Circuit diagram
1 2 3 4
Label carrier Programming button Programming LED Bus connecting terminal
5 EIB LED 6 USB LED 7 USB socket
USB/S 1.1
USB/S 1.1
2CDC 072 035 F0004
2CDC 072 033 F0004
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
Commissioning requirements The USB interface USB/S 1.1 functions under the following operating systems: Microsoft Windows 98, NT, 2000, ME, XP-Professional and XPHome. With Microsoft Windows 98, it should be noted when the USB interface is connected that the file HIDDEV.INF must be installed in the directory Windows/INF with the hardware assistant of Microsoft Windows. The interface is fully functional on an active hub with an external power supply. It does not function on a passive hub without an external power supply as the device is supplied both from the USB and the ABB i-bus. After booting up the PC and starting the ETS 3 program, the USB interface is first connected to the ABB i-bus and then to the USB. Application description No application program is required for the operation of the USB/S 1.1. For documentation purposes, ETS 3 contains a dummy application. This application can be imported as usual in ETS 3. A note appears on the first parameter page stating that it is only a dummy application. There are no parameters or communication objects. The physical address can be set both locally and via the ABB i-bus. Display The EIB LED lights up as soon as the ABB i-bus device is connected and ready for operation. It flashes as soon as telegram traffic takes place on the ABB i-bus. The USB LED lights up as soon as the ABB i-bus and USB device are connected and ready for operation. It flashes as soon as telegram traffic takes place between the USB and ABB i-bus.
USB Interface /1
EIB
USB
Selection in ETS2 ABB Communication USB
USB/S 1.1
USB/S 1.1
ABB i-bus EIB / KNX
USB/S 1.1
USB/S 1.1

ABB-EIB Manual Literature

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB-EIB Manual Literature

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Distribution Boards & Consumer Units

Enclosures for system pro M compact

Distribution Boards & Consumer Units

Type Test Certification

Combination Busbar + DIN Rail

Main MCCB up to 160A T1, E, B, C & N

Main MCCB up to 250A T3N

Multi Row Combination Split type busbar + DIN Rail

Neutral Terminals Bar Earth Terminals Bar

Neutral Terminals Bar Earth Terminals Bar

Multi row type distribution boards 16 modules per row

Type Code GDMS332 RX GDMS348 RX GDMS364 RX GDMS380 RX

B (mm) 518 668 772 940

Type Code GDMS200 EXBEFC GDMS400 EXBEFC GDMS200 EXBFFC

B (mm) 210 410 210

D (mm) K (mm) 200 400 200 74 274 74

A (mm) 227 281 386 458

GCMC 107PLFC GCMC 110PLFC GCMC 116PLFC GCMC 120PLFC

A (mm) 227 281 386 458

GCMC 107SLSC GCMC 110SLSC GCMC 116SLSC GCMC 120SLSC

Publication No:1SKC802027C0201 Printed in Egypt (Dec. 2007) ein visual communication

Description of the symbols: Sample Note Tip Disadvantage Advantage

A central installation requires more wiring effort and expense.

A distributed installation requires less wiring effort on the load end.

ABB i-bus application manual shading/windows/skylights/awnings

Selection of the required circuit and control functions

Switching of one or more positions

2.1.1. KNX bus push buttons

2.1.2 Conventional push buttons with binary input

Fig. 1: Parameters for Binary Input as a shutter sensor

2.1.3. Drive control

Fig. 2: Connection schematic ABB Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.230.1

2.1.3.2. Reversal time or Pause on change in direction

2.1.3.3. End limit stop

The motor also switches off when an obstacle is detected.

2.1.3.4. Parallel connection of several drives

Fig. 5: Source: Berker

This solution is often used to save costs.

2.1.4. Bus voltage failure, bus voltage recovery, programming

2.1.4.1. Status messages

JA JA/S A/S S4 4.SMI.1M .SMI SMI MI I.1M

Fig. 8: Shutter Actuator JA/S 4.SMI.1M and connection schematic

For further information see: www.smi-group.com and manual JA/S 4.SMI.1M

Group and central circuits

2.2.1. Sending two group addresses

2.2.2. Central command and status feedback

3.1.1. Devices for implementation of timer functions

e.g. FW/S 4.5 L1

Date, time (3 bytes)

Fig. 13: Overview KNX devices with time functions

3.1.2. Timer control combined with conditions

3.1.2.1. Linking with external brightness

Fig. 14: Logic for closing movement

Fig. 15: Logic for opening movement

3.1.2.2. Link with presence of persons

3.2.1. Automatic functions

Move to position (height and louvre angle)

Fig. 17: Shutter Actuator with the Positioning function

Fig. 18: KNX push button with 4 rockers

3.2.2. Realisation with standard drives

3.2.2.1. Indirect positioning

3.2.2.2. Direct positioning

1st button push for louvre adjustment

2st button push for louvre adjustment